Microtech Ii™ Applied Rooftop Unit Controller: Operation Manual

Operation Manual OM 138
Group: Applied Systems

Part Number: OM138
Date: April 2001
MicroTech II™
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller
Space Comfort Control (SCC)
• Used with McQuay models: RPS, RFS, RCS, RPR, RFR, RDT, RDS,
RAR and RAH
Discharge Cooling
Disch Air= 55.0°F
Clg Capacity= 50%
Eff Clg Spt= 55°F
© 2000 McQuay International

Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
0-30% Outdoor Air Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Minimum Ventilation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Keypad/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 100% Outdoor Air Damper Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Economizer Changeover Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Minimum Ventilation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Keypad/Display Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cooling: Multistage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Keypad/Display Menu Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Low Ambient Cooling Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Compressor Staging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Circuit Pumpdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Cooling: Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setup/Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Active Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Heating: Multistage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Previous Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Operator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Morning Warm-up Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Determining Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 High Ambient Heating Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
UnitStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Discharge Air Low Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Clg Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Heating: Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Htg Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Clg Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Morning Warm-up Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Htg Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 High Ambient Heating Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Auto/Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Discharge Air Low Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ctrl Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Appl Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Enabling Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Dehumidification Cooling Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Occ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Dehumidification Heating Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Occ Src . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Energy Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Bypass Time (Tenant Override). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Enthalpy Wheel Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Emergency Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Exhaust Fan Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Energy Recovery Bypass Damper Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setting Controller Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Return Fan Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Internal Daily Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Direct Building Static Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Holiday Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Return Fan Direct Position Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
One Event Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 SAF/RAF Differential OA Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Optimal Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Unoccupied Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
External Time Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Network Time Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
About Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Remote Alarm Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Local Alarm Indication (Keypad/Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Remote Alarm Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring Remote Alarm Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Setting Alarm Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 MicroTech II DDC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Unit Configuration/Service Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Direct PID Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calibrate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Cascaded PID Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 PID Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Miscellaneous Service Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Control Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Proportional Band and Integral Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Manual Output Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Adjusting PID Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Correcting System Instability (“Hunting”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Correcting System “Sluggishness” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operating States and Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
About Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Software Identification and Configuration. . . . . 102
Operating State Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Main Control Board (MCB) Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Operating State Sequence Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Main Control Board (MCB) Data Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Startup Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Keypad/Display Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Before Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fan Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Heat/Cool Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2
Document Number: OM 138
Revision: April 2001
McQuay, MicroTech II, and RoofPak are registered trademarks of McQuay International.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright © 2000 McQuay International. All rights reserved throughout the world.
OM 138 3
Introduction
This manual provides information regarding the MicroTech rooftop unit, refer to the applicable model-specific installa-
II control system used in the McQuay RoofPak applied roof- tion and maintenance manual (refer to Table 1).
top unit product line. It specifically describes the sequences
of operation and programmable options for units with fac- Table 1: Model-Specific Rooftop Unit Installation
tory equipped space comfort control (SCC) software. It also Literature
includes information regarding how to use the keypad/dis-
Installation & Maintenance Data
play to enter and display data. Rooftop Unit Model
Bulletin Number
For information regarding MicroTech II components,
RPS (18-40 tons)
input/output configurations, field wiring options and require-
ments, and service procedures, refer to IM696, MicroTech II RFS (18-40 tons) IM 157
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. For installation and startup RCS (18-40 tons)
instructions and general information regarding a particular RPS (45-135 tons)
RFS (45-135 tons) IM 485
RCS (45-135 tons)
RDT IM 486
RDS (800 & 802) IM 178
RAH IM 487
NOTICE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with this instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense.
McQuay International disclaims any liability resulting from any interference or for the correction
thereof.
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Can cause personal injury or equipment damage.
This equipment must be properly grounded. Connections and service to the MicroTech II control panel must
be performed only by personnel that are knowledgeable in the operation of the equipment being controlled.
WARNING
Excessive moisture in the control panel can cause hazardous working conditions and improper
equipment operation.
When servicing this equipment during rainy weather, the electrical components in the main control panel
must be protected from the rain.
4 OM 138
CAUTION
Extreme temperature hazard. Can cause damage to system components.
The MicroTech II controller is designed to operate in ambient temperatures from -20°F to 125°F. It can be
stored in ambient temperatures from -40°F to 140°F. It is designed to be stored and operated in relative
humidity up to 95% (non-condensing).
CAUTION
Static sensitive components. A static discharge while handling electronic circuit boards can cause
damage to the components.
Discharge any static electrical charge by touching the bare metal inside the main control panel before per-
forming any service work. Never unplug any cables, circuit board terminal blocks, relay modules, or power
plugs while power is applied to the panel.
WARNING
To avoid possible unit damage, Compressor pumpdown is required before removing power to the controller.
OM 138 5
Getting Started
The MicroTech II Applied Rooftop Unit Controller is a self- “Setup/Service”, “Active Alarms” and “Previous Alarms.”
contained device that is capable of complete, stand-alone The name of each category generally describes the basic pur-
operation. Information in the controller can be displayed and pose of the menus in the particular group. Complete infor-
modified by using the keypad/display in the unit main con- mation regarding the contents of each sub-menu is included
trol panel. in “Keypad/Display Menu Reference” on page 13.
The following sections describe how to use the keypad/dis-
play. Figure 1: Keypad/display
Using the Keypad/Display

The keypad/display, shown in Figure 1, is provided with all
MicroTech II Applied Rooftop Unit Controllers on these Discharge Cooling
units. With the keypad/display, operating conditions, system Disch Air= 55.0°F
alarms, control parameters, and schedules can be monitored. Clg Capacity= 50%
After password entry, set points, parameters, and schedules Eff Clg Spt= 55°F
can be edited.
Menu Structure
The keypad accessible information in the MicroTech II con-
troller is organized in a menu structure to provide quick
access. As shown in Figure 2 on page 7, this structure con-
tains 1 main menu and a string of 47 sub-menus. Each sub-
menu is made up of one or more menu items. The string of
47 sub-menus is divided into 8 “categories.” The main menu
has eight items within it that “point” or provide a “book-
mark” to the first sub-menu within the respective category.
The eight categories in the main menu are “System Sum-
mary”, “Airflow”, “Temperature”, “Humidity”, “Schedules”,
6 OM 138
Main Menu Keypad Key Definitions
OM 138
System Summary 1
Airflow 2
Temperatures 3
Move Display Left Move Display Right Move Display Up Move Display Down
BACK Move Edit Cursor Right
Humidity 4 Move Edit Cursor Left Increment Adjustable Parameter Decrement Adjustable Parameter
CANCEL
Schedules 5
BACK ENTER CLEAR
Setup/Service 6 ALARM
CANCEL SAVE ALARM
Active Alarms 7
Previous Alarms 8 Backup To Previous Menu Select Menu Display Active Alarm Clear Active Alarm
Cancel Editing Command Save Edited Parameter
1 2 3
System Occupancy Temperatures Airflow Summary Bldg Pressure Zone Cooling Zone Heating
UnitStatus= _____ Occupancy= _____ Control Temp= xxx.x°F Flow Status= _____ Bldg Press= x.xx"WC Control Temp= xxx.x°F Control Temp= xxx.x°F
Figure 2: Keypad Accessible Menu Structure
Clg Capacity= xxx% Occ Mode= Auto Disch Air= xxx.x°F Disch Fan= _____ BldgSP Spt= 0.050"WC Clg Capacity= xxx% Htg Capacity= xxx%
Htg Capacity= xxx% Occ Src= _____ Return Air= xxx.x°F RF/EF Fan= _____ BSP Db= 0.010"WC Eff Clg Spt= xxx.x°F Eff Htg Spt= xxx.x°F
Clg Status= _____ Bypass Time= 0min Space Temp= xxx.x°F Fan Operation= _____ RF/EF Fan Cap= xxx% Occ Clg Spt= 75.0°F Occ Htg Spt= 70.0°F
Htg Status= _____ Emerg Override= Norm OA Temp= xxx.x°F Clg Deadband= 2.0°F Htg Deadband= 2.0°F
Ctrl Mode= Auto Ent Fan= xxx.x°F CtrlTemp Src= Return CtrlTemp Src= Return
Appl Mode= Heat/Cool Space Temp= xxx.x°F Space Temp= xxx.x°F
UnoccClg Spt= 85.0°F UnoccHtg Spt= 55.0°F
UnoccClgDiff= 3.0°F UnoccHtgDiff= 3.0°F
Clg Status= _____ Htg Status= _____
Sub Menus
OATComp Lock= 55°F OATHtg Lock= 55°F
OATLock Diff= 1°F OATLock Diff= 1°F
Discharge Cooling OA Damper Discharge Heating Energy Recovery Dehumidification A
Disch Air= xxx.x°F OA Damper Pos= xxx% Max Signal= 100% Disch Air= xxx.x°F RF/EF Fan Cap= xxx% Dehum Status= _____
Clg Capacity= xxx% Eff Min OA Pos= xxx% MinOAResetMax= 100% Htg Capacity= xxx% EF Min Cap= 5% Rel Humidity= xxx%
Eff Clg Spt= xxx.x°F OA Flow= xxxxxCFM Max Fan Diff= 50% Eff Htg Spt= xxx.x°F Energy Rec= Yes Dew Point= xx.x°F
Clg Db= 1.0°F OA Ambient= _____ Min Fan Diff= 20% Htg Db= 1.0°F Dehum Method=None
Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F MinOA Type= None Reset T Limit= 0°F Min DAT Ctrl= Yes RH Setpoint= 50%
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F DesignFlow= No EconChgovr= Enthalpy MinDAT Limit= 55.0°F DewPoint Spt= 50°F
MinOA Pos= 10% EconChgovrT= 60°F Min Htg Spt= 60.0°F RH Db= 2%
MinOA Flow= 2000CFM EconChgovrDiff= 1°F Max Htg Spt= 120.0°F DewPnt Db= 2°F
MinOA @Max Sig= 60% Max Purge= 60min
Min Signal= 0% OA Temp= xxx.x°F
7
8
5 6
A Daily Schedule One Event Schedule Holiday Schedule Optimal Start Unit Configuration
Mon= 00:00 - 00:00 Beg= mmm dd@hh:mm Hol 1=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 11=mmmdd-mmmdd Space Temp= xxx.x°F AHU ID= _____ 2nd P Sensor= None
Tue= 00:00 - 00:00 End= mmm dd@hh:mm Hol 2=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 12=mmmdd-mmmdd Optimal Start= No CompB1 ID= _____ RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking
Wed= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 3=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 13=mmmdd-mmmdd Auto Update= Yes CompB2 ID= _____ Rem RF/EF Cap= 25%
Thu= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 4=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 14=mmmdd-mmmdd Htg Rate= 0.4°F/min GenCB ID= _____ Eng Units= English
Fri= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 5=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 15=mmmdd-mmmdd Htg OAT= 35°F HtgB ID= _____
Sat= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 6=mmmdd-mmmdd Hol 16=mmmdd-mmmdd Htg Zero OAT= 0°F ERecB ID= _____
Sun= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 7=mmmdd-mmmdd Clg Rate= 0.4°F/min KP ID= _____
Hol= 00:00 - 00:00 Hol 8=mmmdd-mmmdd Clg OAT= 85°F Calibrate Mode= No
Hol 9=mmmdd-mmmdd Clg Zero OAT= 100°F Space Sensor= Yes
Hol 10=mmmdd-mmmdd EFT Sensor= No
Passwords Operating Hours Timer Settings Time/Date Bldg Static P Setup Zone Temp Setup Compressor Setup
Timeout= 15min Fan= xxxxx hr Service= 0min Time= hh:mm:ss BSP Propbd= 1.0"WC Spt Source= Keypad Lead Circuit= #1
Clear Alarm= No Mech Cool= xxxxx hr Recirculate= 3min Day= day BSP IntTime= 10sec Clg Propbd= 8.0°F Comp Ctrl= Cross Circ
Comp 1= xxxxx hr Low DAT= 3min Date= dd-mmm-yyyy BSP Period= 5sec Htg Propbd= 12.0°F Cond Fan1 Spt= 0°F
Figure2: Keypad Accessible Menu Structure (Continued)
Comp 2= xxxxx hr Max MWU= 90min Clg IntTime= 700sec Cond Fan2 Spt= 55°F
Comp 3= xxxxx hr Bypass= 120min Htg IntTime= 500sec Cond Fan3 Spt= 65°F
Comp 4= xxxxx hr Start Init= 180sec Period= 60sec Cond Fan4 Spt= 75°F
Sub Menus (Continued)

Heating= xxxxx hr Min Exh On= 120sec Cond Fan Diff= 10°F
Economizer= xxxxx hr Min Exh Off= 120sec Stage Time= 5min
Bypass= xxxxx hr
Dehumidify= xxxxx hr
ERecovery= xxxxx hr
Chilled Water Setup Economizer Setup DesignFlow Setup Heating Setup Energy Recovery Setup Dehum Setup Manual Control B
Clg Propbd= 30°F Clg Propbd= 30°F Wait Time= 30sec Stage Time= 5min EWhl Propbd= 30°F Dehum Ctrl= Occupied Manual Control= No
Clg IntTime= 60sec Clg IntTime= 60sec Modband= 50% F&BP Ctrl= OpenValve EWhl IntTime= 100sec Minimum Stages= 2 Discharge Fan= Off
Clg Period= 30sec Clg Period= 30sec Max Step= 5.0% F&BP Chgovr= 37°F EWhl Period= 30sec Maximum Stages= 4 RF/EF Fan= Off
Stage Time= 5min Deadband= 6.0% Htg Propbd= 20°F DH Stage Time= 10min Fan Operation= Off
LH Flow= xxx.xx% Htg IntTime= 120sec Sensor Loc= Return Alarm= Normal
RH Flow= xxx.xx% Htg Period= 60sec OA Damper= Auto
Mod Cooling= Auto
Mod Heating= Auto
RF/EF Vanes= Auto
RF/EF VFD= Auto
OM 138
OM 138
7
B Alarm Out Faults Alarm Out Problems Alarm Out Warnings Alarm Limits Active Alarm 1 Active Alarm 2
Freeze= Fast Freeze= Slow Comp #2 Alm= Slow OA Dmpr Stuck= Off Hi Disch Alm= 170°F Alarm Name Alarm Name
Smoke= Fast OAT Sensor= Slow Comp #3 Alm= Slow Airflow Switch= Off Lo Disch Alm= 40°F Alarm Type Alarm Type
Space Sensor= Fast Space Sensor= Slow Comp #4 Alm= Slow Dirty Filter= Off Hi Return Alm= 120°F dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
Return Sensor= Fast Return Sensor= Slow PumpDown-Ckt1= Slow Dirty FnlFltr= Off
Disch Sensor= Fast Ent Fan Sens= Slow PumpDown-Ckt2= Slow Ckt1 H/W= Off
Hi Return Temp= Fast Lo Airflow= Slow Ckt1 Clg Ena= Slow Ckt2 H/W= Off
Hi Disch Temp= Fast Heat Fail= Slow Ckt2 Clg Ena= Slow GenC H/W= Off
Lo Disch Temp= Fast Fan Retry= Slow GenC Clg Ena= Slow HtgB H/W= Off
Fan Fail= Fast Hi Press-Ckt1= Slow HtgB Htg Ena= Slow
OA Dmpr Stuck= Fast Hi Press-Ckt2= Slow Ckt1 Comm Fail= Slow
Lo Press-Ckt1= Slow Ckt2 Comm Fail= Slow
Lo Press-Ckt2= Slow Genc Comm Fail= Slow
Figure2: Keypad Accessible Menu Structure (Continued)
Frost-Ckt1= Slow HtgB Comm Fail= Slow

Frost-Ckt2= Slow ERecB Comm Fail= Slow
Comp #1 Alm= Slow
Sub Menus (Continued)

8
Active Alarm 3 Active Alarm 4 Previous Alarm 1 Previous Alarm 2 Previous Alarm 3 Previous Alarm 4 Previous Alarm 5
Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name
Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type
dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
Previous Alarm 6 Previous Alarm 7 Previous Alarm 8
Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name

Alarm Type Alarm Type Alarm Type
dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
9
Display Format word to 4545 and enter the new value, the following proce-
dure is used:
The information stored in the MicroTech II controller menu
structure can be viewed on the 4-line by 20-character LCD
display. The current menu is displayed on the top line and up
to three menu items are displayed on the next three lines
(refer to Figure 3). The item lines contain one or more data 1. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key one time decrements
fields that convey varying information. A blinking cursor the first field (blinking) to a value of 4.
indicates the current item. There is a “navigation” indicator
on the right side of the top line while in navigation mode.
A symbol indicates there are more items in the menu
“above” the current display window. A symbol indicates
there are more items in the menu “below” the current display 2. Pressing the Right Arrow key one time moves the blink-
window. A symbol indicates there are more items in the ing cursor to the second field.
menu “above” and “below” the current display window.
Figure 3: LCD Display Format

Navigation Indicator 3. Again pressing the Right Arrow key one time (the sec-
ond field will not be changed in this example) moves the
blinking cursor to the third field.
Menu Line Temperatures
Item Line Disch Air=55.0°F
Item Line Return Air=73.5°F
Item Line Space Temp=74.5F
4. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key one time decrements
the third field (now blinking) to a value of 4.
Blinking Cusor
Data Field
Password Protection
5. Now the four fields should be 4545, the desired pass-
The MicroTech II controller includes password protection to word. Pressing the Enter/Save key enters the password.
guard against inadvertent control parameter changes. When
an attempt is made to change the value of an adjustable If the correct password is entered, the display returns to the
parameter with the keypad, the controller prompts the user to item to be changed and the changeable item field is blinking
enter either the level 2 (L-2) or level 1 (L-1) password waiting to be modified.
depending on the level required for that particular parameter.
Password Timeout
The L-2 password is 4545. The L-1 password is 6555.
Once the password is entered, the controller allows further
Note: L-2 has a “higher” level of authority than L-1. The changes without prompting the user to enter a password until
controller prompts for the password by displaying either the password timer expires or a different password
the following: level is required for the particular parameter to be changed.
The password timer is adjustable from 2-60 minutes using
Figure 4: Password Protection the Timeout= parameter in the Passwords menu.
Clear Alarm Password

**Enter L-2 Password
Normally clearing an active alarm does not require a pass-
Password=5555 word entry. This is true if the Clear Alarm= item in the Pass-
words menu is set to “None.” However, if this parameter is
set to “L-1” the controller prompts the user to enter the level
Blinking Data Field 1 password before an alarm can be cleared. If this parameter
is set to “L-2” the controller prompts the user to enter the
level 2 password before an alarm can be cleared. For details
The password fields initially has values off 5555 in them. regarding alarm clearing, refer to “Keypad/Display Exer-
The first field is blinking. For example, to change the pass- cises” on page 11.
10 OM 138
Keypad Functions this key while at the main menu causes a manual password
log off and resets the password timer.
The MicroTech II controller keypad consists of 8 pressure
sensitive membrane switches. Refer to Figure 1 on page 6.
The following are descriptions of these keys and their
functions.
Enter/Save Key:
Pressing this key while viewing a menu on the main menu
changes the displayed menu to the first menu of the menu
Left Arrow Key: group or category associated with that menu. Pressing this
key while viewing a changeable menu item places the key-
Pressing this key changes the displayed menu one menu to
pad into “edit” mode. The first changeable field for that
the left while navigating within the menu structure. It also
parameter begins blinking and the top line of the display is
changes the field to be edited one field to the left while edit-
replaced with **Edit Mode, indicating the “edit” mode is
ing a parameter value.
activated. Once a parameter is changed in “edit” mode,
pressing this key “saves” the new parameter value into mem-
ory. When the new parameter value is saved, the changeable
field or field stops blinking and the **Edit Mode message
disappears from the top line of the display, indicating the
Right Arrow Key:
keypad is no longer in “edit” mode.
Pressing this key changes the displayed menu one menu to
the right while navigating within the menu structure. It also
changes the field to be edited one field to the right while
editing a parameter value.
Alarm Key:
Pressing this key while the red LED above it on the keypad
is blinking changes the displayed menu to the Active Alarm
Up Arrow (+) Key: 1 menu.
Pressing this key changes the displayed menu or menu item

up one menu or menu item while navigating within the menu
structure. It also increments a changeable parameter one
value while editing. Clear Alarm Key:
Pressing this key while any of the active alarm menus are
being displayed sends a clear command to clear the alarm.
Down Arrow (-) Key: Keypad/Display Exercises

Pressing this key changes the displayed menu or menu item The following are three exercises that serve as a guide
down one menu or menu item while navigating within the through some typical keypad operations. Note that often
menu structure. It also decrements a changeable parameter there is more than one way to perform an operation.
one value while editing.
Changing Set Points
In this exercise, assume that the current minimum outdoor
air damper position set point is 15%. Using the following
procedure, the set point is changed to 10%.
Back/Cancel Key:
Pressing this key while navigating within the menu structure
changes the displayed menu back to the main menu. While
editing a changeable parameter, pressing this key causes the
1. Pressing the Back/Cancel key changes the display back
edit session to be terminated and the parameter value reverts
to the main menu if not already there.
to the value it had before beginning the editing session.
Pressing this key after having pressed the Alarm key to view
an active alarm causes the display to revert to the menu that
was in the display prior to pressing the Alarm key. Pressing
OM 138 11
2. Assuming the blinking cursor is positioned on the Sys- holding the Down Arrow (-) causes the value to decre-
tem Summary menu, pressing the Down Arrow (-) key ment rapidly.
twice changes the cursor position to the Temperature
menu.
8. When the MinOA Pos= parameter is at the desired value

(10% in this example), pressing the Enter/Save key
3. Pressing the Enter/Save key changes the display to the stores the new setting and terminates the edit session.
Zone Cooling menu, the first menu in the Temperatures
group of menus. Note: The data field stops blinking when the new value is
recorded and the display leaves the “edit” mode.
Clearing Alarms
4. Pressing the Right Arrow key three times changes the In this exercise, assume that a “fault” alarm exists. This type
display to the OA Damper menu. The cursor is posi- of alarm shuts down the unit and keeps it off until the alarm
tioned on the first item within this menu which is the OA is manually cleared. If the conditions that caused the alarm
Damper Pos= item. have been corrected, the following procedure is used to clear
a fault.
5. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key six times moves the
display down six items in the menu and positions the 1. Pressing the Alarm key while the red LED on the key-
cursor on the MinOA Pos= item. pad is blinking (indicating an active alarm condition)
changes the displayed menu to the Active Alarm 1 menu
which displays the current highest priority alarm.
6. When the Enter/Save key is pressed and if the password

timer has expired since the last time the password was
entered, the controller prompts the user to enter a pass- 2. Pressing the Clear Alarm key sends a clear command to
word at this point. The procedure outlined above in the controller. This clears the alarm and returns the unit
“Password Protection” on page 10 must be followed to to normal operation.
enter the password. Once the password has been suc-
cessfully entered, the display enters the “edit” mode as Modifying Schedules
show below.
In this exercise, assume that a change in building occupancy
When the Enter/Save key is pressed and if a password requires the rooftop unit to run from 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m.
entry is not required, the display simply enters the “edit” on Sunday. The current schedule has the unit shut down on
mode as shown below. Sunday. Using the following procedure, this schedule is
Menu Line **Edit Mode !
changed accordingly. This procedure assumes that the pass-
MinOA Type= None word has previously been entered and the password timer
DesignFlow= No has not expired.
Item Line Being Edited MinOA Pos= 15%
Note: The time schedule and time clock in the MicroTech
Blinking Data Field II controller use “military” time. In this case 5:30
p.m. is equivalent to 17:30 in “military” time.
Note: The Menu Line has been replaced by the “**Edit
Mode” indication message, the cursor has disap-
peared and the date field to be edited is blinking.
1. Pressing the Back/Cancel key changes the display to

back to the main menu if not already there.
7. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key once decrements the

current MinOA Pos= value by one percent. Pressing and
12 OM 138
2. Assuming the blinking cursor is positioned on the Sys- 10. Pressing the Up Arrow (+) key once increments the cur-
tem Summary menu, pressing the Down Arrow (-) key rent “stop hour” value by one hour. Pressing and holding
three times changes the cursor position to the Schedules the Up Arrow (+) causes the value to increment rapidly.
menu.
11. When the “stop hour” is at the desired value (17 in this
3. Pressing the Enter/Save key changes the display to the example), pressing the Right Arrow key moves the
Daily Schedule menu, the first menu in the Schedules blinking cursor to the “stop minute” field.
group of menus.
12. Pressing the Up Arrow (+) key once increments the cur-
4. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key six times moves the rent “stop minute” value by one minute. Pressing and
display down six items in the menu and positions the holding the Up Arrow (+) causes the value to increment
cursor on the Sun= item. rapidly.
5. When the Enter/Save key is pressed (and if a password 13. When the “stop minute” is at the desired value (30 in
entry is not required) the display enters the “edit” mode this example), pressing the Enter/Save key stores the
with the “start hour” data field blinking. new Sun= start/stop setting and terminates the edit ses-
sion.
Note: The data field stops blinking when the new value is
recorded and the display leaves the “edit” mode.
6. Pressing the Up Arrow (+) key once increments the cur-
rent “start hour” value by one hour. Pressing and hold- Keypad/Display Menu Reference
ing the Up Arrow (+) causes the value to increment
The following is a brief description of each menu and menu
rapidly.
item within the rooftop MicroTech II menu structure. Tables
are included which show every menu, item, and field in the
menu structure of the program. These menus and items can
all be displayed with the keypad/display.
7. When the “start hour” is at the desired value (08 in this Note: There are a number of instances where the same
example), pressing the Right Arrow key moves the menu item appears under more that one menu.
blinking cursor to the “start minute” field.
System Summary
Menus in the System Summary category contain basic unit
operating status and control set point parameters. Table 2 on
8. Pressing the Up Arrow (+) key once increments the cur- page 15 lists all menus and items in the System Summary
rent “start minute” value by one minute. Pressing and group or category. The “Range” column in the table lists all
holding the Up Arrow (+) causes the value to increment possible values for each item. The factory settings for the
rapidly. adjustable parameters are shown in the “Factory Default
Value” column. The following are brief descriptions of the
System Summary category menus and items.
System
9. When the “start minute” is at the desired value (30 in The System menu provides a summary of basic unit status
this example), pressing the Right Arrow key moves the and control items.
blinking cursor to the “stop hour” field.
UnitStatus. UnitStatus= is a status only item which indi-
cates the state in which the unit is currently operating. For
detailed information regarding this parameter, refer to
“Determining Unit Status” on page 43.
OM 138 13
Clg Capacity. Clg Capacity= is a status only item which regarding this parameter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation”
indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capac- on page 45.
ity currently operating.
Bypass Time. Bypass Time= is an adjustable item which
Htg Capacity. Htg Capacity= is a status only item which indicates the bypass time remaining when the unit is operat-
indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capac- ing due to bypass operation. For detailed information regard-
ity currently operating. ing this parameter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on
page 45.
Clg Status. Clg Status= is a status only item which indi-
cates whether or not cooling (economizer and/or mechani- Emerg Override . Emerg Override= is an adjustable item
cal) is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, the reason is which provides a means off completely shutting off a unit
indicated. For detailed information regarding this parameter, via a network signal. If this parameter is set to “Off” the unit
refer to “Determining Unit Status” on page 43. can not start based on a time clock or any other means. The
only way the unit can be started is to change this parameter
Htg Status. Htg Status= is a status only item which indi- to “Norm.” For detailed information regarding this parame-
cates whether or not heating is currently allowed. If heating ter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on page 45.
is disabled, the reason is indicated. For detailed information
regarding this parameter, refer to “Determining Unit Status” Temperatures
on page 43. Menus in the Temperatures menu contain unit temperature
Ctrl Mode. Ctrl Mode= is an adjustable item which allows status information.
the unit to be set for manual off, cooling only, heating only, Control Temp. Control Temp= is a status only item which
fan only or auto heating/cooling operation. For detailed displays the current value of the “Control Temperature.” The
information regarding this parameter, refer to “Auto/Manual “Control Temperature” is defined as the temperature input
Operation” on page 45. selected by the CtrlTemp Src= parameter in the Zone Cool-
Note: If this item is set to “Auto”, then cooling only, heating or Zone Heating menu. For example, if the CtrlTemp
ing only, fan only or auto heating/cooling operation Src= parameter is set to “Return”, then the Control Temp=
is determined by a network signal as indicated by parameter reads the same value as the Return Air= parame-
the Appl Mode= item. ter. For detailed information regarding this parameter, refer
to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65.
Appl Mode. Appl Mode= is a network adjustable item
Disch Air. Disch Air = is a status only item which displays
which indicates that the unit is set for network off, cooling
the current temperature reading from the unit discharge air
only, heating only, fan only or auto heating/cooling operation
temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units.
via a network signal. For detailed information regarding this
parameter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on page 45. Return Air. Return Air= is a status only item which dis-
plays the current temperature reading from the unit return air
Note: This item has no affect on the unit operation unless
temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units with
the Ctrl Mode= item is set to “Auto.”
return air.
Occupancy Space Temp. Space Temp= is a status only item which dis-
Menus in the Occupancy menu contain status and control plays the current space (or zone) temperature reading from
items that relate to unit occupied/unoccupied operation. the optional unit space air temperature sensor input. Refer to
“Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor” on page 56.
Occupancy. Occupancy= is a status only item which indi-
cates whether the unit is currently in an occupied, unoccu- Note: If an optional space temperature sensor is not
pied, or bypass mode of operation. For detailed information installed, the Space Sensor= item in the Unit Con-
regarding this parameter, refer to “Determining Unit Status” figuration menu should be set to “No” to disable the
on page 43. alarm function associated with an open circuit at the
space temperature sensor input.
Occ Mode. Occ Mode= is an adjustable item which allows
the unit to be set for manual occupied or unoccupied opera- OA Temp. OA Temp= is a status only item which displays
tion, automatic operation based on a time schedule input or the current temperature reading from the unit mounted out-
manual bypass operation. For detailed information regarding door air temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all
this parameter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on units.
page 45.
Ent Fan. Ent Fan= is a status only item which displays the
Occ Src. Occ Src= is status only item which indicates the current temperature reading from the unit entering fan air
input source or function that is responsible for setting the temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units
Occupancy= parameter to “Occ.” For detailed information equipped with gas or electric heat.
14 OM 138
Table 2: System Summary Menus
Menu Name Menu Item Name Factory Default Value Field Number Range
Off Unoc
Off Man
Off Net
Off Sw
Off Alm
Calib
Startup
Recirc
Fan Only
UnitStatus - -
Econo
Cooling
MWU
Heating
Min DAT
UnocEcon
UnocClg
UnocHtg
Man Ctrl
Clg Capacity - - 0-100%
Htg Capacity - - 0-100%
All Clg
Econo
Mech Clg
System Off Amb
Clg Status - - Off Alm
Off None
Off Sw
Off Net
Off Man
Htg Ena
Off Amb
Off Alm
Htg Status - - Off None
Off Sw
Off Net
Off Man
Off
Auto
Heat/Cool
Ctrl Mode Auto 1
Heat Only
Cool Only
Fan Only
Off
Heat/Cool
Appl Mode Heat/Cool 1 Heat Only
Cool Only
Fan Only
OM 138 15
Table 2: System Summary Menus (Continued)
Occ
Occupancy - - Unocc
Bypass
Occ
Unocc
Occ Mode Auto 1
Bypass
Auto
Occupancy None
Int Sched
Occ Src - - Net Sched
Occ Mode
Remote Sw
Bypass Time 0 min 1 0 -300 min
Norm
Emerg Override Norm 1
Off
Control Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Disch Air - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Return Air - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Temperatures
Space Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
OA Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Ent Fan - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Airflow Bldg Pressure
Menus in the Airflow category contain status and control set The Bldg Pressure menu contains parameters for controlling
point parameters that define the airflow control setup of the building static pressure when a unit is equipped with a build-
unit. Table 3 on page 17 lists all menus and items in the Air- ing static pressure sensor. For detailed information regarding
flow group or category. The “Range” column in the table building static pressure control, refer to “Direct Building
lists all possible values for each item. The factory settings Static Pressure Control” on page 88 or “Exhaust Fan Con-
for the adjustable parameters are shown in the “Factory trol” on page 87.
Default Value” column. The following are brief descriptions
of the Airflow category menus and items. Bldg Press. Bldg Press= is a status only item which indi-
Airflow Summary cates the current pressure at the building static pressure sen-
sor location.
The Airflow Summary menu contains status information
related to unit airflow, static pressure and fan operation. BldgSP Spt. BldgSP Spt= is an adjustable item which sets
the building static pressure set point used for controlling the
Flow Status. Flow Status= is a status only item that indi-
return air or exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD. The inlet vanes
cates whether or not discharge airflow is detected. Airflow
status is sensed by a binary input delivered to the controller or VFD is modulated to maintain the building static pressure
by a differential pressure switch (PC7). sensor input at this set point.
Disch Fan. Disch Fan= is a status only item which indi- BSP Db. BSP Db= is an adjustable item which sets a dead
cates whether or not the controller is commanding the unit band around the BldgSP Spt= parameter in the Bldg Static
discharge fan on. Pressure menu. No building static pressure control action is
taken when the current building static pressure input is
RF/EF Fan. RF/EF Fan= is a status only item which indi-
within this dead band.
cates whether or not the controller is commanding the unit
return or exhaust on. RF/EF Fan Cap. RF/EF Fan Cap= is a status only item
Fan Operation. Fan Operation= is a status only item which indicates the current return or exhaust fan capacity. 0-
which indicates the on/off status of the Fan Operation Output 100% inlet vane position is indicated if the unit is equipped
(MCB-BO3). For details regarding the Fan Operation Out- with return or exhaust fan variable inlet vanes. 0-100% of
put, refer to the “Field Output Signals” section of IM 696, VFD maximum speed is indicated if the unit is equipped
MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. with a return or exhaust fan VFD
16 OM 138
.
Table 3: Airflow Menus
Flow
Flow Status - -
NoFlow
On
Disch Fan - -
Off
Airflow Summary
On
RF/EF Fan - -
Off
On
Fan Operation - -
Off
Bldg Press - - -0.250 - 0.250 “WC
BldgSP Spt 0.050 “WC 1 -0.250 - 0.250 “WC
Bldg Pressurea
BSP Db 0.010 “WC 1 0.001-0.100 “WC
RF/EF Fan Cap - - 0 - 100%
a. The items in this menu apply to units configured for direct building pressure control of return air fan inlet vanes or VFD or units equipped with an energy recovery wheel
option.
Temperature trol Temp= parameter rises above this parameter by more

than half the Clg Deadband= parameter, cooling capacity is
Menus in the Temperature category contain status and con-
increased. When the current value of the Control Temp=
trol set point parameters that define the temperature control
parameter drops below this parameter by more than half the
setup of the unit. Table 4 on page 22 lists all menus and
Clg Deadband= parameter cooling capacity is decreased.
items in the Temperature group or category. The “Range”
This parameter is either set by the controller to same value as
column in the table lists all possible values for each item.
the Occ Clg Spt= parameter or based on a signal from an
The factory settings for the adjustable parameters are shown
optional space temperature sensor with set point adjustment
in the “Factory Default Value” column. The following are
capability. For details regarding the use of thermostat sup-
brief descriptions of the Temperature category menus and
plied set points, refer to “Tstat Source Set Points” on
items.
page 66.
Zone Cooling
Occ Clg Spt. Occ Clg Spt= is an adjustable item used by
The Zone Cooling menu primarily contains basic status and the controller to set the Eff Clg Spt= parameter. The Eff Clg
control parameters that relate to or affect the unit changeover Spt= is set to this value when it is not being set based on a
into cooling operation and control of the space or zone tem- signal from an optional space temperature sensor with set
perature while in cooling operation. For detailed information point adjustment capability. For details regarding the use of
regarding unit heating/cooling changeover, refer to thermostat supplied set points, refer to “Tstat Source Set
“Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65. Points” on page 66.
Control Temp. Control Temp= is a status only item which Clg Deadband. Clg Deadband= is an adjustable item
displays the current value of the “Control Temperature.” The which sets a dead band around the Eff Clg Spt= parameter.
“Control Temperature” is defined as the temperature input For example, if the Eff Clg Spt= parameter is set to 75ºF and
selected by the CtrlTemp Src= parameter in the Zone Cool- the Clg Deadband= parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band
ing or Zone Heating menu. For example, if the CtrlTemp around the set point would be from 76.0ºF to 74.0ºF.
Src= parameter is set to “Return”, then the Control Temp=
CtrlTemp Src. CtrlTemp Src= is an adjustable item which
parameter reads the same value as the Return Air= parame-
selects the temperature sensor input to be used for the unit
ter. For more information regarding this parameter, refer
heating/cooling changeover or zone cooling and heating
to“Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65.
capacity change decisions. For example, if the CtrlTemp
Clg Capacity. Clg Capacity= is a status only item which Src= parameter is set to “Return”, then the Control Temp=
indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capac- parameter reads the same value as the Return Air= parame-
ity currently operating. ter. For detailed information regarding this parameter, refer
to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65.
Eff Clg Spt. Eff Clg Spt= is a status only item which indi-
cates the cooling changeover or zone cooling control set Space Temp. Space Temp= is a status only item which dis-
point currently in effect. When the current value of the Con- plays the current space (or zone) temperature reading from
OM 138 17
the optional unit space air temperature sensor input. Refer to Htg Capacity. Htg Capacity= is a status only item which
“Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor” on page 56. indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capac-
ity currently operating.
Note: If an optional space temperature sensor is not
installed, the Space Sensor= item in the Unit Con- Eff Htg Spt. Eff Htg Spt= is a status only item which indi-
figuration menu should be set to “No” to disable the cates the heating changeover or zone heating control set
alarm function associated with an open circuit at the point currently in effect. When the current value of the Con-
space temperature sensor input. trol Temp= parameter, falls below this parameter by more
than half the Htg Deadband= parameter, heating capacity is
UnoccClg Spt. UnoccClg Spt= is an adjustable item increased. When the current value of the Control Temp=
which sets the point at which the unit starts up and provides parameter rises above this parameter by more than half the
unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods. Htg Deadband= parameter heating capacity is decreased.
For detailed information regarding unoccupied cooling oper- This parameter is either set by the controller to same value as
ation, refer to “Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup)” on the Occ Htg Spt= parameter or based on a signal from an
page 90. optional space temperature sensor with set point adjustment
Note: An optional space temperature sensor is required capability. For details regarding the use of thermostat sup-
for unoccupied cooling operation. plied set points, refer to “Tstat Source Set Points” on
page 66.
UnoccClgDiff. UnoccClgDiff= is an adjustable item which
sets a differential above the UnoccClg Spt= parameter. Once Occ HtgSpt. Occ Htg Spt= is an adjustable item used by
activated, unoccupied cooling operation is terminated when the controller to set the Eff Htg Spt= parameter. The Eff Htg
the Space Temp= value falls below the UnoccClg Spt= set- Spt= is set to this value when it is not being set based on a
ting by more than this differential. signal from an optional space temperature sensor with set
point adjustment capability. For details regarding the use of
Clg Status. Clg Status= is a status only item which indi- thermostat supplied set points, refer to “Tstat Source Set
cates whether or not cooling (economizer and/or mechani- Points” on page 66.
cal) is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, the reason is
indicated. For detailed information regarding this parameter, Htg Deadband. Htg Deadband= is an adjustable item
refer to “Determining Unit Status” on page 43. which sets a dead band around the Eff Htg Spt= parameter.
For example, if the Eff Htg Spt= parameter is set to 70ºF and
OATComp Lock. OATComp Lock= is an adjustable item the Htg Deadband= parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band
which sets the low outdoor air temperature mechanical cool- around the set point would be from 68.0ºF to 72.0ºF.
ing lockout point. Compressor operation is disabled when
the outdoor air temperature sensor input falls below this set CtrlTemp Src. CtrlTemp Src= is an adjustable item which
point. selects the temperature sensor input to be used for the unit
heating/cooling changeover or zone cooling and heating
OATLock Diff. OATLock Diff= is an adjustable item which capacity change decisions. For example, if the CtrlTemp
sets a differential above the OATComp Lock= parameter. Src= parameter is set to “Return”, then the Control Temp=
Compressor operation is re-enabled when the outdoor air parameter reads the same value as the Return Air= parame-
temperature sensor input rises above the OATComp Lock= ter. For detailed information regarding this parameter, refer
value by more than this differential. to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65.
Zone Heating
Space Temp. Space Temp= is a status only item which dis-
The Zone Heating menu primarily contains basic status and plays the current space (or zone) temperature reading from
control parameters that relate to or affect the unit changeover the optional unit space air temperature sensor input. Refer to
into heating operation and control of the space or zone tem- “Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor” on page 56.
perature while in heating operation. For detailed information
regarding unit heating/cooling changeover, refer to Note: If an optional space temperature sensor is not
“Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65. installed, the Space Sensor= item in the Unit Con-
figuration menu should be set to “No” to disable the
Control Temp. Control Temp= is a status only item which alarm function associated with an open circuit at the
displays the current value of the “Control Temperature.” The space temperature sensor input.
“Control Temperature” is defined as the temperature input
selected by the CtrlTemp Src= parameter in the Zone Cool- UnoccHtg Spt. UnoccHtg Spt= is an adjustable item
ing or Zone Heating menu. For example, if the CtrlTemp which sets the point at which the unit starts up and provides
Src= parameter is set to “Return”, then the Control Temp= unoccupied heating (night setback) during unoccupied peri-
parameter reads the same value as the Return Air= parame- ods. For detailed information regarding unoccupied heating
ter. For detailed information regarding this parameter, refer operation, refer to “Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)” on
to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65. page 89.
18 OM 138
Note: An optional space temperature sensor is required the controller to limit the discharge air temperature while
for unoccupied heating operation. controlling the space or zone conditions. For detailed infor-
mation on discharge air temperature control, refer to “Econo-
UnoccHtgDiff. UnoccHtgDiff= is an adjustable item which
mizer” on page 68, “Cooling: Multistage” on page 72 or
sets a differential above the UnoccHtg Spt= parameter. Once
“Cooling: Modulating” on page 77 as applicable.
activated, unoccupied heating operation is terminated when
the Space Temp= value rises above the UnoccHtg Spt= set- Max Clg Spt. Min Clg Spt= is an adjustable item which
ting by more than this differential. sets a maximum cooling discharge temperature set point
used by the controller to limit the discharge air temperature
Htg Status. Htg Status= is a status only item which indi- while controlling the space or zone conditions. For detailed
cates whether or not heating is currently allowed. If heating information on discharge air temperature control, refer to
is disabled, the reason is indicated. “Economizer” on page 68, “Cooling: Multistage” on page 72
OATHtg Lock. OATHtg Lock= is an adjustable item which or “Cooling: Modulating” on page 77 as applicable.
sets the high outdoor air temperature heating lockout point. OA Damper
Heating operation is disabled when the outdoor air tempera-
The OA Damper menu contains parameters that relate to or
ture sensor input rises above this set point.
are used to control the unit outdoor air dampers. For detailed
OATLock Diff. OATLock Diff= is an adjustable item which information regarding outdoor air damper control, refer to
sets a differential below the OATHtg Lock= parameter. Heat- “0-30% Outdoor Air Damper Control” on page 68, “100%
ing operation is re-enabled when the outdoor air temperature Outdoor Air Damper Control” on page 68, or “Economizer”
sensor input below the OATHtg Lock= value by more than on page 68, as applicable.
this differential.
OA Damper Pos. OA Damper Pos= is a status only item
Discharge Cooling which indicates the current outdoor air damper position.
The Discharge Cooling menu contains parameters that relate Eff Min OA Pos. Eff Min OA Pos= is a status only item
to or are used to maintain the discharge temperature when which indicates the minimum outdoor air minimum position
the unit is changed over into cooling operation. For detailed set point currently in effect. Economizer dampers are con-
information regarding cooling operation, refer to “Heat/Cool trolled to maintain this position whenever minimum ventila-
Changeover” on page 65, “Economizer” on page 68, “Cool- tion is required. For detailed information regarding
ing: Multistage” on page 72, and “Cooling: Modulating” on minimum ventilation control, refer to “Minimum Ventilation
page 77, as applicable. Control” on page 68 (0-30% outdoor air units) or “Minimum
Disch Air. Disch Air = is a status only item which displays Ventilation Control” on page 70 (economizer units) as
the current temperature reading from the unit discharge air applicable.
temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units. OA Flow. OA Flow= is a status only item which indicates
Clg Capacity. Clg Capacity= is a status only item which the current outdoor airflow based on an optional OA airflow
indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capac- sensor input used when the unit is equipped the DesignFlow
ity currently operating. OA control feature.
OA Ambient. OA Ambient= is a status only item which
Eff Clg Spt. Eff Clg Spt= is a status only item which indi-
indicates whether or not the outdoor air is suitable for free
cates the cooling discharge air temperature set point cur-
cooling. If it is, “Low” is displayed. If not, “High” is dis-
rently in effect during the Econo operating state or during the
played. The free cooling decision can be based on either an
Cooling operating state when the unit is equipped with
enthalpy switch input to the controller or on a dry bulb OA
chilled water cooling. Economizer dampers or the chilled
temperature set point. This decision is made via the EconCh-
water valve is modulated to maintain the unit discharge air
govr= parameter. For detailed information regarding econo-
temperature at this set point. This Eff Clg Spt= parameter is
mizer changeover operation refer to “Economizer
raised and lowered by the controller as necessary to maintain
Changeover Method” on page 69.
the Eff Clg Spt= in the Zone Cooling menu. For detailed
information regarding economizer and chilled water cooling MinOA Type. MinOA Type= is an adjustable item used to
operation, refer to“Economizer” on page 68 or “Cooling: select between a fixed damper position and one of three
Modulating” on page 77. available methods of automatically resetting the Eff Min OA
Pos= parameter.
Clg Db. Clg Db= is an adjustable item which sets a dead
band around the Eff Clg Spt= parameter. For example, if the Note: If the unit is equipped with the DesignFlow outdoor
Eff Clg Spt= parameter is set to 55ºF and the Clg Db= air measuring system and the DesignFlow= param-
parameter is set to 1ºF the dead band around the set point eter is set to “Yes”, the MinOA Type= parameter
would be from 55.5ºF to 54.5ºF. automatically reverts to “None”.
Min Clg Spt. Min Clg Spt= is an adjustable item which sets For detailed information regarding minimum ventilation
a minimum cooling discharge temperature set point used by control, refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 68
OM 138 19
(0-30% outdoor air units) or “Minimum Ventilation Control” 0-100% refers to 0-100% of 10VDC. For detailed informa-
on page 70 (economizer units) as applicable. tion regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to “Mini-
mum Ventilation Control” on page 68 (0-30% outdoor air
DesignFlow. DesignFlow= is an adjustable item used to
units) or “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70 (econo-
turn the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring
mizer units) as applicable.
reset function on and off. This is one of several available
methods of automatically resetting the Eff Min OA Pos= MinOA ResetMax. MinOA ResetMax= is an adjustable
parameter. For detailed information regarding minimum item which sets a maximum value to which the Eff Min OA
ventilation control, refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” Pos= parameter can be set. When reset by any of the possi-
on page 70. ble methods, the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter varies between
the Min OA Pos= and the MinOA ResetMax= value. For
MinOA Pos. MinOA Pos= is an adjustable item used by the detailed information regarding minimum ventilation control,
controller to set the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter. When the refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 68 (0-30%
Eff Min OA Pos= parameter is not being set based on one of outdoor air units) or “Minimum Ventilation Control” on
the possible outdoor damper position reset functions, it is set page 70 (economizer units) as applicable.
to the MinOA Pos= value. For detailed information regard-
ing minimum ventilation control, refer to “Minimum Venti- Max Fan Diff. Max Fan Diff= is an adjustable item which
lation Control” on page 68 (0-30% outdoor air units) or sets a differential between the discharge and return fan
“Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70 (economizer capacities above which the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter is
units) as applicable. reset to the MinOA ResetMax= value. As the difference
between the discharge and return fan capacities varies
MinOA Flow. MinOA Flow= is an adjustable item used by between the Min Fan Diff= and Max Fan Diff= values, the
the controller to set the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter when Eff Min OA Pos= parameter varies between the MinOA
the unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow OA con- Pos= and the MinOA ResetMax= value. For detailed infor-
trol feature. When the DesignFlow= parameter is set to mation regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to
“Yes”, the Eff Min OA Pos= is reset to maintain the OA “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70.
Flow= value at the MinOA Flow= setting. For detailed infor-
mation regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to Min Fan Diff. Min Fan Diff= is an adjustable item which
“Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70. sets a differential between the discharge and return fan
capacities above which the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter
MinOA @Max Sig. MinOA @Max Sig= is an adjustable begins to be reset from the MinOA Pos= value toward the
item used to set the Eff Min OA Pos= when the MinOA MinOA ResetMax= value. As the difference between the dis-
Type= is set to “Ext mA” or “Ext V.” When either “Ext mA” charge and return fan capacities varies between the Min Fan
or “Ext V” is selected, the Eff Min OA Pos= is reset between Diff= and Max Fan Diff= values, the Eff Min OA Pos=
the MinOA Pos= value and the MinOA @Max Sig= value as parameter varies between the MinOA Pos= and the MinOA
a field supplied external current or voltage signal varies ResetMax= value. For detailed information regarding mini-
between a minimum and maximum value. For detailed infor- mum ventilation control, refer to “Minimum Ventilation
mation regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to Control” on page 70.
“Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 68 (0-30% outdoor
air units) or “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70 Reset T Limit. Reset T Limit= is an adjustable item which
(economizer units) as applicable. sets a discharge air temperature low limit which overrides
functions that reset the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter if the
Min Signal. Min Signal= is an adjustable item used to discharge air temperature gets too cold. For detailed infor-
define the minimum value of the field supplied current or mation regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to
voltage signal used to adjust the Eff Min OA Pos= when the “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70.
MinOA Type= is set to “Ext mA” or “Ext V.” Min Signal= is
EconChgovr. EconChgovr= is an adjustable item which
adjustable from 0-100%. When “Ext mA” is selected, 0-
defines the method used to make the economizer changeover
100% refers to 0-100% of 20mA. When “Ext V” is selected,
decision. When EconChgovr= is set to “Enthalpy”, the econ-
0-100% refers to 0-100% of 10VDC. For detailed informa-
omizer changeover decision is based on the enthalpy switch
tion regarding minimum ventilation control, refer to “Mini-
input to the controller. When the switch is closed, the OA
mum Ventilation Control” on page 68 (0-30% outdoor air
Ambient= item indicates “Low” and economizer operation is
units) or “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70 (econo-
enabled. When the switch is open, the OA Ambient= item
mizer units) as applicable.
indicates “High” and economizer operation is disabled.
Max Signal. Max Signal= is an adjustable item used to When EconChgover= is set to “Dry Bulb”, the economizer
define the maximum value of the field supplied current or changeover decision is based on the outdoor air temperature
voltage signal used to adjust the Eff Min OA Pos= when the compared to the EconChgovrT= item. When the outdoor air
MinOA Type= is set to “Ext mA” or “Ext V.” Max Signal= is temperature is below the EconChgovr T= value, the OA
adjustable from 0-100%. When “Ext mA” is selected, 0- Ambient= item indicates “Low” and economizer operation is
100% refers to 0-100% of 20mA. When “Ext V” is selected, enabled. When the outdoor air temperature is above the
20 OM 138
EconChgovr T= value, the OA Ambient= item indicates Spt= in the Zone Heating menu. For detailed information
“High” and economizer operation is disabled. For detailed regarding modulating heating operation, refer to“Heating:
information regarding economizer changeover operation Modulating” on page 80.
refer to “Economizer Changeover Method” on page 69.
Htg Db. Htg Db= is an adjustable item which sets a dead
EconChgovrT. EconChgovrT= is an adjustable item used band around the Eff Htg Spt= parameter. For example, if the
to make the economizer changeover decision when the Eff Htg Spt= parameter is set to 100ºF and the Htg Db=
EconChgovr= parameter is set to “Dry Bulb.” It sets the parameter is set to 1ºF the dead band around the set point
point below or above which the outdoor air temperature would be from 100.5ºF to 99.5ºF.
enables or disables economizer operation. If the EconCh-
govr= parameter is set to “Enthalpy”, this parameter has no Min DAT Ctrl. Min DAT Ctrl= is an adjustable item used to
effect on the unit operation. For detailed information regard- activate or deactivate the low discharge temperature limit
ing economizer changeover operation refer to “Economizer function available on units equipped with modulating or
Changeover Method” on page 69. multistage heat. For detailed information regarding the low
discharge temperature limit function, refer to “Discharge Air
EconChgovrDiff. EconChgovrDiff= is an adjustable item Low Limit Control” on page 80 (multistage heat) or “Dis-
which sets a differential above the EconChgovrT= parame- charge Air Low Limit Control” on page 84 (modulating
ter. When the EconChgovr= parameter is set to “Dry Bulb”, heat) as applicable.
economizer operation is disabled when the OA Temp=
parameter indicates a value above the EconChgovrT= MinDAT Limit. MinDAT Limit= is an adjustable item
parameter by more than this differential. If the EconChgovr= which sets the low discharge temperature limit used in the
parameter is set to “Enthalpy”, this parameter has no effect low discharge temperature limit function available on units
on the unit operation. For detailed information regarding equipped with modulating or multistage heat. For detailed
economizer changeover operation refer to “Economizer information regarding the low discharge temperature limit
Changeover Method” on page 69. function, refer to “Discharge Air Low Limit Control” on
page 80 (multistage heat) or “Discharge Air Low Limit Con-
Max Purge. Max Purge= is an adjustable item which sets trol” on page 84 (modulating heat) as applicable.
the maximum time prior to occupancy that the units purge
feature can be activated. This feature functions only when an Min Htg Spt. Min Htg Spt= is an adjustable item which
optional space (or zone) temperature sensor is installed and sets a minimum heating discharge temperature set point used
when a unit internal time schedule is being used. For detailed by the controller to limit the discharge air temperature while
information regarding the purge feature, refer to “Purge” on controlling the space or zone conditions. For detailed infor-
page 90. mation on discharge air temperature control, refer to “Heat-
ing: Multistage” on page 78 or “Heating: Modulating” on
OA Temp. OA Temp= displays the current temperature
page 80 as applicable.
reading from the unit mounted outdoor air temperature sen-
sor. This sensor is standard on all units. Max Htg Spt. Max Htg Spt= is an adjustable item which
Discharge Heating sets a maximum heating discharge temperature set point
used by the controller to limit the discharge air temperature
The Discharge Heating menu contains parameters that relate while controlling the space or zone conditions. For detailed
to or are used to maintain the discharge temperature when information on discharge air temperature control, refer to
the unit is changed over into heating operation. For detailed “Heating: Multistage” on page 78 or “Heating: Modulating”
information regarding heating operation, refer to “Heat/Cool on page 80 as applicable.
Changeover” on page 65, “Heating: Multistage” on page 78,
and “Heating: Modulating” on page 80, as applicable. Energy Recovery
Disch Air. Disch Air= is a status only item which displays The Energy Recovery menu contains parameters that relate
the current temperature reading from the unit discharge air to or are used to control the enthalpy wheel and exhaust fan
temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units. when a unit is equipped with an optional energy recovery
wheel system. For detailed information regarding the energy
Htg Capacity. Htg Capacity= is a status only item which recovery control, refer to “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capac-
ity currently operating. RF/EF Fan Cap. RF/EF Fan Cap= is a status only item
which indicates the current return or exhaust fan capacity. 0-
Eff Htg Spt. Eff Htg Spt= is a status only item which indi- 100% inlet vane position is indicated if the unit is equipped
cates the heating discharge air temperature set point cur- with return or exhaust fan variable inlet vanes. 0-100% of
rently in effect during heating operation when the unit is VFD maximum speed is indicated if the unit is equipped
equipped with modulating heating. The heating valve is with a return or exhaust fan VFD.
modulated to maintain the unit discharge air temperature at
this set point. This Eff Htg Spt= parameter is raised and low- EF Min Cap. EF Min Cap= is an adjustable item which
ered by the controller as necessary to maintain the Eff Htg sets a minimum exhaust fan capacity limit used to start and
OM 138 21
stop the exhaust fan when a unit is equipped with an optional Energy Rec. Energy Rec= is an adjustable item which
energy recovery system. turns the optional energy recovery system on and off.
Table 4: Temperature Menus

Control Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Eff Clg Spt - - 0.0 - 99.0 °F
Occ Clg Spt 75.0 °F 1 0.0 - 99.0 °F
Clg Deadband 1.0 °F 1 0.1 - 9.9 °F
Return
CtrlTemp Src Return 1 Space
OAT
Space Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
UnoccClg Spt 85.0 °F 1 55.0 - 99.0 °F
UnoccClgDiff 3.0 °F 1 1.0 - 10.0 °F
Zone Cooling
All Clg
Econo
Mech Clg
Off Amb
Clg Status - - Off Alm
Off None
Off Sw
Off Net
Off Man
OATComp Lock 55 °F 1 0 - 100 °F
OATLock Diff 1 °F 1 0 - 10 °F
Control Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Eff Htg Spt - - 0.0 - 99.0 °F
Occ Htg Spt 70.0 °F 1 0.0 - 99.0 °F
Htg Deadband 1.0 °F 1 0.1 - 9.9 °F
Return
CtrlTemp Src Return 1 Space
OAT
Space Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
UnoccHtg Spt 55.0 °F 1 0.0 - 99.0 °F
Zone Heating
UnoccHtgDiff 3.0 °F 1 1.0 - 10.0 °F
- Htg Ena
Off Amb
Off Alm
Htg Status - Off None
Off Sw
Off Net
Off Man
OATHtg Lock 55 °F 1 0 - 100 °F
OATLock Diff 1 °F 1 0 - 10 °F
Disch Air - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Eff Clg Spt - - 40.0 - 100.0 °F
Discharge Cooling
Clg Db 1.0 °F 1 0.1 - 10.0 °F
Min Clg Spt 55.0 °F 1 40.0 - 100.0 °F
Max Clg Spt 65.0 °F 1 40.0 - 100.0 °F
22 OM 138
Table 4: Temperature Menus (Continued)
OA Damper Pos - - 0-100%
Eff Min OA Pos - - 0-100%
OA Flow - - 0-50000 CFM
Low
OA Ambient - -
High
None
Auto
MinOA Type None 1
Ext mA
Ext V
No
DesignFlow No 1
Yes
MinOA Pos 10% 1 0-100%
MinOA Flow 2000 CFM 1 0-50000 CFM
OA Damper
MinOA @Max Sig 60% 1 0-100%
Min Signal 0% 1 0-100%
Max Signal 100% 1 0-100%
MinOA ResetMax 100% 1 0-100%
Max Fan Diff 50% 1 0-100%
Min Fan Diff 20% 1 0-100%
Reset T Limit 0°F 1 0-60°F
Enthalpy
EconChgovr Enthalpy 1
Dry Bulb
EconChgovrT 60 °F 1 0 - 99 °F
EconChgovrDiff 1 °F 1 0 - 10 °F
Max Purge 60 min 1 0-240 min
OA Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Disch Air - - -50 - 250.0 °F
Eff Htg Spt - - 40.0 - 100.0 °F
Htg Db 1.0 °F 1 0.1 - 10.0 °F
Discharge Heating No
Min DAT Ctrl Yes 1
Yes
MinDAT Limit 55.0 °F 1 0.0 - 70.0 °F
Min Htg Spt 60.0 °F 1 40.0 - 100.0 °F
Max Htg Spt 120.0 °F 1 40.0 - 100.0 °F
RF/EF Fan Cap - - 0-100%
EF Min Cap 5% 1 0-100%
Energy Recovery
No
Energy Rec= Yes 1
Yes
Humidity Dehumidification
Menus in the Humidity category contain status and control The Dehumidification menu contains status information
set point parameters that define the dehumidification control related to unit dehumidification operation.
setup of the unit. Table 5 on page 24 lists all menus and
Dehum Status. Dehum Status= is a status only item that
items in the Humidity group or category. The “Range” col-
indicates whether or not dehumidification operation is
umn in the table lists all possible values for each item. The
active.
factory settings for the adjustable parameters are shown in
the “Factory Default Value” column. For detailed informa- Rel Humidity. Rel Humidity= is a status only item that dis-
tion regarding the dehumidification function refer to “Dehu- plays the current reading from the optional relative humidity
midification” on page 85. The following are brief sensor.
descriptions of the Humidity category menus and items.
Dew Point. Dew Point= is a status only item that indicates
the current dew point reading calculated based on the current
reading from the optional relative humidity sensor.
OM 138 23
Table 5: Humidity Menus
Dehumid Status - -
Rel Humidity - -
Dew Point - -
None
Dehumid Method None 1 RH
Dehumidification
DewPnt
RH Setpoint 50% 1 0-99%
DewPoint Spt 50°F 1 0.0-99.0°F
RH Db 2% 1 0-10%
DewPnt Db 2°F 1 0-10°F
Dehum Method. Dehum Method= is an adjustable item Mon. Mon= is an adjustable item which sets one start and
used to turn the de humid if action function on and off and to one stop time for Monday.
select whether dehumidification operation is based on rela-
Tue. Tue= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
tive humidity or dew point.
stop time for Tuesday.
RH Setpoint. RH Setpoint= is an adjustable item that sets
Wed. Wed= is an adjustable item which sets one start and
the relative humidity set point used when the Dehum
one stop time for Wednesday.
Method= parameter is set to “RH”.
Thu. Thu= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
DewPoint Spt. DewPoint Spt= is an adjustable item that
stop time for Thursday.
sets the dew point set point used when the Dehum Method=
parameter is set to “DewPnt”. Fri. Fri= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
stop time for Friday.
RH Db. RH Db= is an adjustable item that sets a dead band
around the relative humidity set point. For example, if the Sat. Sat= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
RH Setpoint= parameter is set to 50% and the RH Db= stop time for Saturday.
parameter is set to 2% the dead band around the set point Sun. Sun= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
would be from 48% to 52%. stop time for Sunday.
DewPnt Db. DewPnt Db= is an adjustable item that sets a Hol. Hol= is an adjustable item which sets one start and one
dead band around the dew point set point. For example, if the stop time for Holidays.
DewPoint Spt= parameter is set to 50ºF and the DewPnt
Db= parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set One Event Schedule
point would be from 48ºF to 52ºF. The One Event Schedule menu contains parameters for set-
ting a beginning and ending date and time for a one event
Schedules schedule which overrides the daily internal start stop sched-
Menus in the Schedules category contain status and control ule for that period.
set point parameters that relate to scheduling the start stop of
Beg. Beg= is an adjustable item which sets the start date
the unit. Table 6 on page 25 lists all menus and items in the
and time for a one event schedule which overrides the daily
Schedules group or category. The “Range” column in the
internal start stop schedule for the period defined by it and
table lists all possible values for each item. The factory set-
the End= parameter.
tings for the adjustable parameters are shown in the “Factory
Default Value” column. The following are brief descriptions End. End= is an adjustable item which sets the stop date
of the Schedules category menus and items. For detailed and time for a one event schedule which overrides the daily
information regarding scheduling the start/stop of the unit, internal start stop schedule for the period defined by it and
refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on page 45 and “Schedul- the Beg= parameter.
ing” on page 48. Holiday Schedule
Daily Schedule The Holiday Schedule menu contains parameters for defin-
The Daily Schedule menu contains parameters for setting the ing up to 16 holiday periods throughout the year. A begin-
daily internal start stop schedule for the unit. ning and ending date is assigned to each holiday period. On
24 OM 138
each day of the holiday period, the holiday schedule entered tion where the controller “learns” and updates the optimal
in the Daily Schedules menu is used. start parameters automatically based on previous results.
Hol 1 through Hol 16. Hol 1= through Hol 16= are Htg Rate. Htg Rate= is an adjustable item used by the con-
adjustable items which are used to define up to 16 holiday troller in determining the amount time before occupancy to
periods throughout the calendar year. start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set to “On.”
Optimal Start
Htg OAT. Htg OAT= is an adjustable item used by the con-
The Optimal Start menu contains parameters for adjusting troller in determining the amount time before occupancy to
the action of the optimal start function. For detailed informa- start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set to “On.”
tion regarding the optimal start function, refer to “Optimal
Start” on page 50. Htg Zero OAT. Htg Zero OAT= is an adjustable item used
by the controller in determining the amount time before
Space Temp. Space Temp= is a status only item which dis-
occupancy to start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set
plays the current space (or zone) temperature reading from
to “On.”
the optional unit space air temperature sensor input. Refer to
“Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor” on page 56. Clg Rate. Clg Rate= is an adjustable item used by the con-
Note: If an optional space temperature sensor is not troller in determining the amount time before occupancy to
installed, the Space Sensor= item in the Unit Con- start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set to “On.”
figuration menu should be set to “No” to disable the Clg OAT. Clg OAT= is an adjustable item used by the con-
alarm function associated with an open circuit at the troller in determining the amount time before occupancy to
space temperature sensor input. start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set to “On.”
Optimal Start. Optimal Start= is an adjustable item used
Clg Zero OAT. Clg Zero OAT= is an adjustable item used
to turn the optimal start function on and off.
by the controller in determining the amount time before
Auto Update. Auto Update= is an adjustable item used to occupancy to start when the Optimal Start= parameter is set
turn on and off a feature included in the optimal start func- to “On.”
Table 6: Schedules Menus

00 1 00 - 23
00 2 00 - 59
Mon
00 3 00 - 23
00 4 00 - 59
Tue Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Daily Schedule Wed Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Thu Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Fri Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Sat Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Sun Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
Hol Same As Monday Same As Monday Same As Monday
1 Jan-Dec
2 01-31
Beg N/A
3 00-23
4 00-59
One Event Schedule
1 Jan-Dec
2 01-31
End N/A
3 00-23
4 00-59
OM 138 25
Table 6: Schedules Menus (Continued)
1 Jan-Dec
2 01-31
Hol 1 N/A-N/A
3 Jan-Dec
4 01-31
Hol 2 Same As Hol 1 Same As Hol 1 Same As Hol 1
Holiday Schedule Hol 7 Same As Hol 1 Same As Hol 1 Same As Hol 1
Space Temp - - -50 - 250.0 °F
No
Optimal Start No 1
Yes
No
Auto Update Yes 1
Yes
Optimal Start Htg Rate 0.4 °F/min 1 0-1 °F/min
Htg OAT 35 °F 1 0 - 255 °F
Htg Zero OAT 0 °F 1 -40 - 60 °F
Clg Rate 0.4 °F/min 1 0-1 °F/min
Clg OAT 85 °F 1 0 - 255 °F
Clg Zero OAT 100 °F 1 60 - 140 °F
Setup/Service CompB1 ID. CompB1 ID= is a status only item which

identifies the version of the application software loaded into
Menus in the Setup/Service category contain status and con-
compressor control board #1 (CCB1) on a unit equipped
trol parameters that relate to the setup and service of the unit.
with compressorized cooling. Refer to “Software Identifica-
Parameters in these menus are generally the type that are set
tion and Configuration” on page 102.
at the factory and might be adjusted when the equipment is
started up and generally do not required further adjustment. CompB2 ID. CompB2 ID= is a status only item which
Table 7 on page 35 lists all menus and items in the identifies the version of the application software loaded into
Setup/Service group or category. The “Range” column in the compressor control board #2 (CCB2) on a unit equipped
table lists all possible values for each item. The factory set- with compressorized cooling. Refer to “Software Identifica-
tings for the adjustable parameters are shown in the “Factory tion and Configuration” on page 102.
Default Value” column. The following are brief descriptions
of the Setup/Service category menus and items. GenCB ID. GenCB ID= is a status only item which identi-
fies the version of the application software loaded into the
Unit Configuration generic condenser control board (CCB1) on a unit equipped
The Unit Configuration menu contains parameters that with a DX cooling coil and interfaced with a field supplied
define various basic unit configuration attributes. condensing unit. Refer to “Software Identification and Con-
figuration” on page 102.
AHU ID. AHU ID= is a status only item which identifies the
version of application software loaded into the unit main HtgB ID. HtgB ID= is a status only item which identifies
control board (MCB) Refer to “Software Identification and the version of the application software loaded into the elec-
Configuration” on page 102. tric heat control board (EHB1) on a unit equipped with mul-
26 OM 138
tistage electric heat. Refer to “Software Identification and RF/EF Ctrl. RF/EF Ctrl= is an adjustable item used to
Configuration” on page 102 select the type of return or exhaust fan airflow control to be
used. If the unit is equipped with return fan inlets vanes or a
ERecB ID. ERecB ID= is a status only item which identi- VFD and this parameter is set to “Tracking”, then the return
fies the version of application software loaded into the fan airflow is controlled based on an adjustable tracking rela-
energy recovery control board (ERB1) on a unit equipped tionship between the discharge fan and return fan airflow. If
with an energy recovery wheel system. Refer to “Software this parameter is set to “Bldg”, then the return or exhaust fan
Identification and Configuration” on page 102 airflow is controlled independently of the discharge fan air-
KP ID. KP ID= is a status only item which identifies the flow to maintain the building static pressure at a building
version of the keypad object loaded into the unit main con- static pressure set point. If this parameter is set to “Position”,
trol board (MCB). Refer to “Keypad/Display Objects” on then the return or exhaust fan airflow is controlled to an inlet
page 103. vane position or VFD speed set point set via a network sig-
nal. For detailed information regarding return or exhaust fan
Calibrate Mode. Calibrate Mode= is an adjustable item capacity control, refer to “Return Fan Capacity Control” on
used to place the unit into the Calib operating state. In this page 88 or “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
state the unit is shut off and all the unit actuator feedback
Rem RF/EF Cap. Rem RF/EF Cap= is an adjustable item
signals are calibrated. The unit static pressure sensor input
which adjusts the return/exhaust air vane position or VFD
signals are also zeroed during this state. For detailed infor-
speed when the RF/EF Ctrl= parameter is set to “Position.”
mation regarding calibration, refer to “Calibrate Mode” on
This parameter can be manually adjusted if it is not being set
page 56.
via a network signal. It is also used when the Fan Balance=
Space Sensor. Space Sensor= is an adjustable item used parameter is set to “On” to manually position the return fan
to indicate whether or not an optional space air temperature vanes of VFD during the fan balance procedure. For detailed
sensor is installed. Setting this parameter to “No” disables information regarding return or exhaust fan capacity control,
the alarm function associated with an open circuit at the refer to “Return Fan Capacity Control” on page 88 or
space temperature sensor input. Also, if “No” is selected, the “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
Cntl Temp Src= parameter cannot be set to “Space” and the Eng Units. Eng Units= is an adjustable item used to select
Clg Reset= and the Htg Reset= parameters cannot be set to the system of engineering units used for displaying data on
“Space.” For more information regarding the optional space the keypad. If this parameter is set to “English”, the keypad
temperature sensor, refer to “Zone (Space) Temperature Sen- data is displayed in inch-pound (I-P) units of measurement.
sor” on page 56 If this parameter is set to “SI Canada”, the keypad data is
EFT Sensor. EFT Sensor= is an adjustable item used to displayed in the International System of Units (SI) used in
indicate whether or not an optional entering fan air tempera- Canada. If this parameter is set to “SI Europe”, the keypad
ture sensor is installed. Setting this parameter to “No” dis- data is displayed in the International System of Units (SI)
ables the alarm function associated with an open circuit at used in Europe.
the EFT temperature sensor input. This sensor is installed Passwords
only on units equipped with either gas or electric heat and is
The “Passwords” menu contains parameters that relate to the
used by the controller to calculate the heat rise across the
keypad passwords. For detailed information regarding pass-
heat exchanger by comparing it to the discharge air tempera-
words, refer to “Password Protection” on page 10.
ture input. The controller uses this information to protect the
heat exchanger against overheating. Timeout. Timeout= is an adjustable item used to set the
duration of a timer which is set whenever the keypad pass-
2nd P Sensor. 2nd P Sensor= is an adjustable item used to word is entered. Once the password is entered, set points can
indicate whether or not an optional building static pressure be changed and alarms can be cleared without reentering the
sensor is installed in a unit. When this parameter is set to password.
“Bldg”, the controller assumes there is a building static pres-
sure sensor wired to the “second sensor” location. Clear Alarm. Clear Alarm= is an adjustable item used to
set which password level is required to allow the user to
Note: One a zone (or space comfort) control unit, there is clear alarms. If this parameter is set to “Lvl 1” then at least
not “first sensor” location. the level 1 password must be entered to allow alarms to be
cleared. If this parameter is set to “Lvl 2” then the level 2
In this case the unit return inlet vanes or VFD are controlled password must be entered to allow alarms to be cleared. If
to maintain the building pressure at a building pressure set this parameter is set to “None” then a password entry is not
point. When this parameter is set to “None”, the controller required to allow alarms to be cleared.
assumes there is not a second static pressure sensor installed
and ignores the associated analog input. For detailed infor- Operating Hours
mation regarding return fan capacity control, “Return Fan The Operating Hours menu contains items that indicate how
Capacity Control” on page 88. many hours the fans, cooling and heating, override and
OM 138 27
energy recover have been operating. This information can be ERecovery. ERecovery= is a status item which indicates
used for scheduling maintenance and monitoring unit opera- the hours that the optional energy recovery system has been
tion. in operation. This value accumulates to 50,000 hours before
rolling over. This status item can be reset or adjusted manu-
Fan. Fan= is a status item which indicates the hours that the ally from the keypad.
unit fans have operated. This value accumulates to 50,000
hours before rolling over. This status item can be reset or Timer Settings
adjusted manually from the keypad. The Timer Settings menu contains several parameters for
Mech Cool. Mech Cool= is a status item which indicates setting the controller process timers. For detailed informa-
the hours that the unit mechanical cooling has operated. This tion regarding these timers, refer to “Control Timer Settings”
value accumulates to 50,000 hours before rolling over. This on page 58.
status item can be reset or adjusted manually from the key- Service. Service= is an adjustable item which sets a time
pad. period during which many of the controller process timers,
such as the cooling and heating interstage timers, are sped
Comp 1. Comp 1= is a status item which indicates the
up. Once this parameter is set to a none-zero time value the
hours compressor #1 has operated on units equipped with
fast timers are used until this timer expires.
compressorized cooling. This value accumulates to 50,000
hours before rolling over. This status item can be reset or Recirculate. Recirculate= is an adjustable item which
adjusted manually from the keypad. defines the duration of the Recirc operating state.
Comp 2. Comp 2= is a status item which indicates the Low DAT. Low DAT= is an adjustable item which sets the
hours compressor #2 has operated on units equipped with duration of a time period after unit start up during which the
compressorized cooling. This value accumulates to 50,000 Lo Disch Tmp fault ignored.
hours before rolling over. This status item can be reset or
Max MWU. Max MWU= is an adjustable item which sets a
adjusted manually from the keypad.
maximum duration for the MWU (morning warm up) operat-
Comp 3. Comp 3= is a status item which indicates the ing state.
hours compressor #3 has operated on units equipped with
Bypass. Bypass= is an adjustable item which sets the time
compressorized cooling. This value accumulates to 50,000
period during which the unit operates each time the tenant
hours before rolling over. This status item can be reset or
override button on the optional space temperature sensor is
pressed or the Occ Mode= parameter is switched to
Comp 4. Comp 4= is a status item which indicates the “Bypass.” For detailed information regarding bypass opera-
hours compressor #4 has operated on units equipped with tion refer to “Bypass Time (Tenant Override)” on page 48.
compressorized cooling. This value accumulates to 50,000 Start Init. Start Init= is an adjustable item which sets the
hours before rolling over. This status item can be reset or duration of the Startup operating state.
Min Exh On. Min Exh On= is an adjustable item which sets
Heating. Heating= is a status item which indicates the a minimum on time for the exhaust fan when a unit is
hours that the unit heating has operated. This value accumu- equipped with an optional energy recovery system. For
lates to 50,000 hours before rolling over. This status item can detailed information regarding the optional energy recovery
be reset or adjusted manually from the keypad. system, refer to “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
Economizer. Economizer= is a status item which indicates Min Exh Off. Min Exh Off= is an adjustable item which
the hours that the unit has been in the Econo operating state. sets a minimum off time for the exhaust fan when a unit is
This value accumulates to 50,000 hours before rolling over. equipped with an optional energy recovery system. For
This status item can be reset or adjusted manually from the detailed information regarding the optional energy recovery
keypad. system, refer to “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
Bypass. Bypass= is a status item which indicates the hours Time/Date
that the unit has operated in the schedule bypass mode of
The Time/Date menu contains three parameters for setting
operation. This value accumulates to 50,000 hours before
the controller current date and time. For detailed information
rolling over. This status item can be reset or adjusted manu-
regarding these parameters, refer to “Setting Controller Date
ally from the keypad.
and Time” on page 49.
Dehumidify. Dehumidify= is a status item which indicates Time. Time= is an adjustable item which sets the controller
the hours that the dehumidification function has operated. current time.
This value accumulates to 50,000 hours before rolling over.
This status item can be reset or adjusted manually from the Note: The time must be entered and is displayed in “mili-
keypad. tary” time (hh:mm:ss).
28 OM 138
Day. Day= is a status only item which displays the current analog set point adjustment input from a optional remotely
day of the week based on the value of the Date= parameter. mounted space temperature sensor. For details regarding the
use of thermostat supplied set points, refer to “Tstat Source
Date. Date= is an adjustable item which sets the current
Set Points” on page 66.
date including date, month and year.
Clg Propbd. Clg Propbd= is an adjustable item which sets
Bldg Static P Setup
the “proportional band” used in the PID control function that
The Bldg Static P Setup menu contains several adjustable adjusts the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling
parameters which affect the response timing for the PID con- menu to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= set point in the Zone
trol action used by the controller when modulating the return Cooling menu. In general, increasing this value has a slow-
or exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD to maintain building static ing effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on
pressure. These parameters apply only when the RF/EF this control action.
Ctrl= parameter in the Unit Configuration menu is set to
“BldgPres.” For detailed information regarding these control Htg Propbd. Htg Propbd= is an adjustable item which sets
parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on the “proportional band” used in the PID control function that
page 99. adjusts the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heating
menu to maintain the Eff Htg Spt= set point in the Zone
BSP Propbd. BSP Propbd= is an adjustable item which Heating menu. In general, increasing this value has a slow-
sets the “proportional band” used in the PID control function ing effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on
that modulates the return air or exhaust fan inlet vanes or this control action.
VFD in response to building static pressure. In general,
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this Clg IntTime. Clg IntTime= is an adjustable item which sets
value has a speeding effect on the control of the return or the “integral time” used in the PID control function that
exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD. adjusts the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling
menu to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= set point in the Zone
BSP IntTime. BSP IntTime= is an adjustable item which Cooling menu. In general, increasing this value has a slow-
varies the “integral time” used in the PID control function ing effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on
that modulates the return air or exhaust fan inlet vanes or this control action.
VFD in response to building static pressure. In general,
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this Htg IntTime. Htg IntTime= is an adjustable item which sets
value has a speeding effect on the control of the return or the “integral time” used in the PID control function that
exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD. adjusts the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heating
menu to maintain the Eff Htg Spt= set point in the Zone
BSP Period. BSP Period= is an adjustable item which sets Heating menu. In general, increasing this value has a slow-
the “sampling period” used in the PID control function that ing effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on
modulates the return air or exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD. this control action.
In general, increasing this value has a slowing effect and
decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the control of Period. Period= is an adjustable item which sets the
the return or exhaust fan inlet vanes or VFD. “period” used in the PID control function that adjusts the Eff
Clg Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= parameters in the Discharge
Zone Temp Setup Cooling and Discharge Heating menus to maintain the Eff
The Zone Temp Setup menu contains several adjustable Clg Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= set points in the Zone Cooling
parameters which affect the response timing for the PID con- and Zone Heating menus. In general, increasing this value
trol action used by the controller when adjusting the Eff Clg has a slowing effect and decreasing this value has a speeding
Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= parameters in the Discharge Cooling effect on this control action.
and Discharge Heating menus to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= Compressor Setup
and Eff Htg Spt= set points in the Zone Cooling and Zone
The Compressor Setup menu contains several adjustable
Heating menus. For detailed information regarding PID con-
parameters than affect the compressor and condenser fan
trol parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on
staging on units equipped with compressorized cooling. For
page 99.
detailed information regarding compressorized cooling stag-
Spt Source. Spt Source= is an adjustable item which ing operation, refer to “Cooling: Multistage” on page 72.
determines the source for setting the Eff Clg Spt= and Eff
Lead Circuit. Lead Circuit= is an adjustable item used to
Htg Spt= set points in the Zone Cooling and Zone Heating
select the lead cooling circuit or to select automatic lead/lag
menu. When this parameter is set “Keypad”, the Eff Clg
of the cooling circuits. For detailed information regarding
Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= set points in the Zone Cooling and
cooling circuit lead/lag operation, refer to “Compressor
Zone Heating menus are set to the Occ Clg Spt= and Occ
Staging” on page 73.
Htg Spt= values respectively. When this parameter is set
“Tstat”, the Eff Clg Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= set points in the CompCtrl. CompCtrl= is an adjustable item used to select
Zone Cooling and Zone Heating menus are set based on an the circuit staging method to be use during cooling opera-
OM 138 29
tion. When this parameter is set to “Cross Circ”, cooling is Stage Time. Stage Time= is an adjustable item used to set
staged up and down alternating between cooling circuit #1 a minimum cooling time period. Once a unit enters the Cool-
and #2. When this parameter is set to “Lead Load”, the ing operating state, the chilled water valve must be closed
“lead” cooling circuit is first staged up completely before the for this time period before the unit leaves the Cooling operat-
second cooling circuit is staged up. For detailed information ing state
regarding circuit staging operation, refer to “Compressor
Economizer Setup
Staging” on page 73.
The Economizer Setup menu contains several adjustable
Cond Fan1 Spt. Cond Fan1 Spt= is an adjustable item parameters that affect the response timing for the PID con-
used to set the outdoor air temperature point above which the trol action used by the controller when modulating the econ-
first condenser fan in each cooling circuit is turned on. omizer dampers to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in
the Discharge Cooling menu. For detailed information
Cond Fan2 Spt. Cond Fan2 Spt= is an adjustable item
regarding these control parameters, refer to “MicroTech II
used to set the outdoor air temperature point above which the
DDC Features” on page 99.
second condenser fan in each cooling circuit is turned on.
Clg Propbd. Clg Propbd= is an adjustable item which sets
Cond Fan3 Spt. Cond Fan3 Spt= is an adjustable item the “proportional band” used in the PID control function that
used to set the outdoor air temperature point above which the modulates the economizer dampers to maintain the Eff Clg
third condenser fan in each cooling circuit is turned on. Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general,
Cond Fan4 Spt. Cond Fan4 Spt= is an adjustable item increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this
used to set the outdoor air temperature point above which the value has a speeding effect on the control of the dampers.
fourth condenser fan in each cooling circuit is turned on. Clg IntTime. Clg IntTime= is an adjustable item which sets
Stage Time. Stage Time= is an adjustable item used to set the “integral time” used in the PID control function that
the minimum time between consecutive cooling staging modulates economizer dampers to maintain the Eff Clg Spt=
actions. parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general,
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this
Chilled Water Setup value has a speeding effect on the control of the dampers.
The Chilled Water Setup menu contains several adjustable Clg Period. Clg Period= is an adjustable item which sets
parameters that affect the response timing for the PID con- the “sampling period” used in the PID control function that
trol action used by the controller when modulating the modulates economizer dampers to maintain the Eff Clg Spt=
chilled water valve to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general,
the Discharge Cooling menu. For detailed information increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this
regarding these control parameters, refer to “MicroTech II value has a speeding effect on the control of the dampers.
DesignFlow Setup
Clg Propbd. Clg Propbd= is an adjustable item which sets The DesignFlow Setup menu contains several adjustable
the “proportional band” used in the PID control function that parameters that affect the response timing for the control
modulates the chilled water valve to maintain the Eff Clg action used by the controller when modulating the outdoor
Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general, air dampers to maintain the MinOA Flow= setting. For
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this detailed information regarding these control parameters,
value has a speeding effect on the control of the chilled water refer to “DesignFlow OA Airflow Measurement Reset” on
valve. page 71.
Clg IntTime. Clg IntTime= is an adjustable item which sets Wait Time. Wait Time= is an adjustable item which sets the
the “integral time” used in the PID control function that “wait time” used in the control function that modulates the
modulates the chilled water valve to maintain the Eff Clg Eff Min OA Pos= parameter to maintain the OA Flow=
Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general, parameter at the MinOA Flow= set point when a unit is
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow
value has a speeding effect on the control of the chilled water measuring feature. For details regarding the DesignFlow
valve. option, refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 68.
Clg Period. Clg Period= is an adjustable item which sets Modband. Modband= is an adjustable item which sets the
the “sampling period” used in the PID control function that “modulation band” used in the control function that modu-
modulates the chilled water valve to maintain the Eff Clg lates the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter to maintain the OA
Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. In general, Flow= parameter at the MinOA Flow= set point when a unit
increasing this value has a slowing effect and decreasing this is equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow
value has a speeding effect on the control of the chilled water measuring feature. For details regarding the DesignFlow
valve. option, refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” on page 70
30 OM 138
Wait Time. Wait Time= is an adjustable item which sets the maintain the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heat-
“wait time” used in the control function that modulates the ing menu. In general, increasing this value has a slowing
Eff Min OA Pos= parameter to maintain the OA Flow= effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the
parameter at the MinOA Flow= set point when a unit is heating or face and bypass damper control actuator. For
equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow detailed information on this PID control parameter, refer to
measuring feature. “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
Max Step. Max Step= is an adjustable item which sets the Htg IntTime. Htg IntTime= is an adjustable item which sets
“maximum step” used in the control function that modulates the “integral time” used in the PID control function that
the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter to maintain the OA Flow= modulates the heating valve or face and bypass dampers to
parameter at the MinOA Flow= set point when a unit is maintain the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heat-
equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow ing menu. In general, increasing this value has a slowing
measuring feature. effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the
Deadband. Deadband= is an adjustable item which sets heating or face and bypass damper control actuator. For
the “deadband” used in the control function that modulates detailed information on this PID control parameter, refer to
Eff Min OA Pos= parameter to maintain the OA Flow= “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
parameter at the MinOA Flow= set point when a unit is Htg Period. Htg Period= is an adjustable item which sets
equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow the “sampling period” used in the PID control function that
measuring feature. modulates the heating valve or face and bypass dampers to
LH Lvl Pos. LH Lvl Pos= is a status item which is used maintain the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heat-
calibrate the left-hand side (unit opposite drive side) of the ing menu. In general, increasing this value has a slowing
optional DesignFlow outdoor measuring apparatus. For effect and decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the
details regarding calibration of the DesignFlow apparatus, control of the heating or face and bypass damper control
refer to the applicable model-specific installation and main- actuator. For detailed information on this PID control param-
tenance manual (refer to Table 1 on page 4). eter, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
RH Lvl Pos. RH Lvl Pos= is a status item which is used Energy Rec Setup
calibrate the right-hand side (unit drive side) of the optional The Energy Rec Setup menu contains several adjustable
DesignFlow outdoor measuring apparatus. For details parameters that affect the response timing for the PID con-
regarding calibration of the DesignFlow apparatus, refer to trol action used by the controller on units equipped with an
the applicable model-specific installation and maintenance energy recovery system when modulating the enthalpy
manual (refer to Table 1 on page 4). wheel to prevent wheel frosting. For detailed information
Heating Setup regarding these control parameters, refer to “MicroTech II
The Heating Setup menu contains several adjustable parame-
ters that affect the control action used by the controller to EWhl Propbd. EWhl Propbd= is an adjustable item which
modulate the heating and/or face and bypass damper control sets the “proportional band” used in the PID control function
actuator to maintain the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Dis- that modulates the enthalpy wheel to prevent wheel frosting.
charge Heating menu. In general, increasing this value has a slowing effect and
decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the modulation
Stage Time. Stage Time= is an adjustable item used to set
of the enthalpy wheel.
a minimum time period between heating staging actions.
EWhl IntTime. EWhl IntTime= is an adjustable item which
F&BP Ctrl. F&BP Ctrl= is an adjustable item used to
sets the “integral time” used in the PID control function that
determine the type of heating valve control to be used on
modulates the enthalpy wheel to prevent wheel frosting. In
units equipped with face and bypass heating. For detailed
general, increasing this value has a slowing effect and
information regarding heating face and bypass operation,
decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the modulation
refer to “Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper
of the enthalpy wheel.
Control-Open Valve Method” on page 81.
F&BP Chgovr. F&BP Chgovr= is an adjustable item used EWhl Period. EWhl Period= is an adjustable item which
to determine when the heating valve is driven fully open sets the “sampling period” used in the PID control function
when the F&BP Ctrl= parameter is set to “ModValve.” For that modulates the enthalpy wheel to prevent wheel frosting.
detailed information regarding heating face and bypass oper- In general, increasing this value has a slowing effect and
ation, refer to “Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass decreasing this value has a speeding effect on the modulation
Damper Control-Open Valve Method” on page 81. of the enthalpy wheel.
Htg Propbd. Htg Propbd= is an adjustable item which sets Dehum Setup
the “proportional band” used in the PID control function that The Dehum Setup menu contains several adjustable parame-
modulates the heating valve or face and bypass dampers to ters that affect the control action of the dehumidification
OM 138 31
function. For detailed information regarding the dehumidifi- Alarm. Alarm= is an adjustable item used to manually turn
cation control function, for detailed information regarding the Remote Alarm Output (MCB-BO4) on and off.
the dehumidification function, refer to “Dehumidification”
OA Damper. OA Damper= is an adjustable item used to
on page 85.
manually drive the outdoor air dampers open and closed.
Dehum Ctrl. Dehum Ctrl= is an adjustable item which Mod Cooling. Mod Cooling= is an adjustable item used to
determines when the dehumidification function is allowed to manually drive the modulating cooling valve open and
operate. If this parameter is set to “Occupied”, the dehumidi- closed.
fication function is only allowed to operate during occupied
time periods. If this parameter is set to “Always”, the dehu- Mod Heating. Mod Heating= is an adjustable item used to
midification is allowed to operate during occupied and unoc- manually drive the modulating heating valve open and
cupied time periods. closed.
Minimum Stages. Minimum Stages= is an adjustable item RF/EF Vanes. RF/EF Vanes= is an adjustable item used to
which sets the number of cooling stages that are immediately manually drive the return air or exhaust fan inlet vanes open
activated upon a call for dehumidification operation. and closed.
Maximum Stages. Maximum Stages= is an adjustable RF/EF VFD. RF/EF VFD= is an adjustable item used to
item which sets the maximum number of cooling stages that manually increase and decrease the return air or exhaust fan
are activated during dehumidification operation. VFD speed.
Alarm Out Faults
DH Stage Time. DH Stage Time= is an adjustable item
which sets a stage time period between the minimum and The Alarm Out Faults menu contains parameters for deter-
maximum cooling stages during dehumidification operation. mining the action of the Remote Alarm Output (MCB-BO4)
When the controller initially activates dehumidification when “fault” alarms occur. The Remote Alarm Output is on
operation, cooling is staged up to the Minimum Stages= continuously when there are no active alarms within the con-
value and this timer beings to time out. After this timer troller. Each alarm can be set up to cause the Remote Alarm
expires, cooling is staged up to the Maximum Stages= value Output to turn off, blink quickly, blink slowly or remain on
if there is still a call for dehumidification. continuously when the alarm occurs. For detailed informa-
tion on configuring the Remote Alarm Output, refer to “Con-
Sensor Loc. Sensor Loc= is an adjustable item which figuring Remote Alarm Output” on page 54.
determines which temperature sensor is used in combination
with the relative humidity sensor input to calculate the dew Freeze. Freeze= is an adjustable item used to determine the
point value. This parameter can either be set to “Space” or action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Freeze fault
“Return”. occurs.
Manual Control Smoke. Smoke= is an adjustable item used to determine the

action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Smoke fault
The Manual Control menu contains parameters used to con- occurs.
trol the outputs from the controller (MCB) in a manual
mode. This can be used to test the operation of the various Space Sensor. Space Sensor= is an adjustable item used
devices controlled by the outputs. For detailed information to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
regarding manual operation, refer to “Manual Output Con- the Space Sensor fault occurs.
trol” on page 59. Return Sensor. Return Sensor= is an adjustable item used
Manual Control. Manual Control= is an adjustable item to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
used to turn the manual control mode of operation on and the Return Sensor fault occurs.
off. When this parameter is set to “No” the unit operates nor- Disch Sensor. Disch Sensor= is an adjustable item used to
mally. When this parameter is set to “Yes” normal control of determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
the control outputs is overridden and the condition of each Disch Sensor fault occurs.
output is defined by setting the remaining items within the
Manual Control menu. Hi Return Tmp. Hi Return Tmp= is an adjustable item
used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output
Discharge Fan. Discharge Fan= is an adjustable item when the Hi Return Tmp fault occurs.
used to manually turn the discharge air fan on and off.
Hi Disch Tmp. Hi Disch Tmp= is an adjustable item used
RF/EF Fan. RF/EF Fan= is an adjustable item used to to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
manually turn the return air or exhaust fan on and off. the Hi Disch Tmp fault occurs.
Fan Operation. Fan Operation= is an adjustable item Lo Disch Tmp. Lo Disch Tmp= is an adjustable item used
used to manually turn the Fan Operation Output (MCB- to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
BO3) on and off. the Lo Disch Tmp fault occurs.
32 OM 138
Fan Fail. Fan Fail= is an adjustable item used to determine Frost-Ckt2. Frost-Ckt2= is an adjustable item used to
the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Fan Fail determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
fault occurs. Frost-Ckt2 problem occurs.
OA Dmpr Stuck. OA Dmpr Stuck= is an adjustable item Comp #1 Alm. Comp #1 Alm= is an adjustable item used
used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
when the OA Dmpr Stuck fault occurs the Comp #1 Alm problem occurs.
Alarm Out Problems Comp #2 Alm. Comp #2 Alm= is an adjustable item used
The Alarm Out Problems menu contains parameters for to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
determining the action of the Remote Alarm Output (MCB- the Comp #2 Alm problem occurs.
BO4) when “problem” alarms occur. The Remote Alarm
Comp #3 Alm. Comp #3 Alm= is an adjustable item used
Output is on continuously when there are no active alarms
to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
within the controller. Each alarm can be set up to cause the
the Comp #3 Alm problem occurs.
Remote Alarm Output to turn off, blink quickly, blink slowly
or remain on continuously when the alarm occurs. For Comp #4 Alm. Comp #4 Alm= is an adjustable item used
detailed information regarding configuring the Remote to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
Alarm Output, refer to “Configuring Remote Alarm Output” the Comp #4 Alm problem occurs.
on page 54.
PumpDown-Ckt1. PumpDown-Ckt1= is an adjustable
Freeze. Freeze= is an adjustable item used to determine the item used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Out-
action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Freeze prob- put when the PumpDown-Ckt1 problem occurs.
lem occurs.
PumpDown-Ckt2. PumpDown-Ckt2= is an adjustable
OAT Sensor. OAT Sensor= is an adjustable item used to item used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Out-
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the put when the PumpDown-Ckt2 problem occurs.
OAT Sensor problem occurs.
Ckt1 Clg Ena. Ckt1 Clg Ena= is an adjustable item used to
Space Sensor. Space Sensor= is an adjustable item used determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when Ckt1 Clg Ena problem occurs.
the Space Sensor problem occurs.
Ckt2 Clg Ena. Ckt2 Clg Ena= is an adjustable item used to
Return Sensor. Return Sensor= is an adjustable item used
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
Ckt2 Clg Ena problem occurs.
the Return Sensor problem occurs.
GenC Clg Ena. GenC Clg Ena= is an adjustable item used
Ent Fan Sens. Ent Fan Sens= is an adjustable item used to
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
the GenC Clg Ena problem occurs.
Ent Fan Sens problem occurs.
Heat Fail. Heat Fail= is an adjustable item used to deter- HtgB Htg Ena. HtgB Htg Ena= is an adjustable item used
mine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Heat to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when
Fail problem occurs. the HtgB Htg Ena problem occurs.
Hi Pres-Ckt1. Hi Pres-Ckt1= is an adjustable item used to Ckt1 Comm Fail. Ckt1 Comm Fail= is an adjustable item
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output
Hi Pres-Ckt1 problem occurs. when the Ckt1 Comm Fail problem occurs.
Hi Pres-Ckt2. Hi Pres-Ckt2= is an adjustable item used to Ckt2 Comm Fail. Ckt2 Comm Fail= is an adjustable item
Hi Pres-Ckt2 problem occurs. when the Ckt2 Comm Fail problem occurs.
Lo Pres-Ckt1. Lo Pres-Ckt1= is an adjustable item used to GenC Comm Fail. GenC Comm Fail= is an adjustable
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the item used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Out-
Lo Pres-Ckt1 problem occurs. put when the GenC Comm Fail problem occurs.
Lo Pres-Ckt2. Lo Pres-Ckt2= is an adjustable item used to HtgB Comm Fail. HtgB Comm Fail= is an adjustable item
Lo Pres-Ckt2 problem occurs. when the HtgB Comm Fail problem occurs.
Frost-Ckt1. Frost-Ckt1= is an adjustable item used to ERecB Comm Fail. ERecB Comm Fail= is an adjustable
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the item used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Out-
Frost-Ckt1 problem occurs. put when the ERecB Comm Fail problem occurs.
OM 138 33
Alarm Out Warnings Ckt2 H/W. Ckt2 H/W= is an adjustable item used to deter-
The Alarm Out Warnings menu contains parameters for mine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Ckt2
determining the action of the Remote Alarm Output (MCB- H/W warning occurs.
BO4) when “warning” alarms occur. The Remote Alarm GenC H/W. GenC H/W= is an adjustable item used to
Output is on continuously when there are no active alarms determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the
within the controller. Each alarm can be set up to cause the GenC H/W warning occurs.
Remote Alarm Output to turn off, blink quickly, blink slowly
or remain on continuously when the alarm occurs. For HtgB H/W. HtgB H/W= is an adjustable item used to deter-
detailed information regarding configuring the Remote mine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the HtgB
Alarm Output, refer to “Configuring Remote Alarm Output” H/W warning occurs.
on page 54. Alarm Limits
OA Dmpr Stuck. OA Dmpr Stuck= is an adjustable item The Alarm Limits menu contains parameters for setting three
used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output miscellaneous temperature alarm limits.
when the OA Dmpr Stuck warning occurs.
Hi Disch Alm. Hi Disch Alm= is an adjustable item which
Airflow Switch. Airflow Switch= is an adjustable item sets a high discharge air temperature alarm limit. If the dis-
used to determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output charge air temperature input exceeds this setting, the unit
when the Airflow Switch warning occurs. shuts down completely on the Hi Disch Tmp fault.
Dirty Filter. Dirty Filter= is an adjustable item used to Lo Disch Alm. Lo Disch Alm= is an adjustable item which
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the sets a low discharge air temperature alarm limit. If the dis-
Dirty Filter warning occurs. charge air temperature input falls below this setting while
Dirty FnlFltr. Dirty FnlFltr= is an adjustable item used to mechanical cooling is not operating, the unit shuts down
determine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the completely on the Lo Disch Tmp fault.
Dirty FnlFltr warning occurs.
Hi Return Alm. Hi Return Alm= is an adjustable item
Ckt1 H/W. Ckt1 H/W= is an adjustable item used to deter- which sets a high return air temperature alarm limit. If the
mine the action of the Remote Alarm Output when the Ckt1 return air temperature input exceeds this setting, the unit
H/W warning occurs. shuts down completely on the Hi Return Tmp fault.
34 OM 138
Table 7: Setup/Services Menus
AHU ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
CompB1 ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
CompB2 ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
GenCB ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
HtgB ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
ERecB ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
KP ID - - xxxxxxxxxx
No
Calibrate Mode No 1
Yes
No
Space Sensor Yes 1
Yes
No
Unit Configuration EFT Sensor No 1
Yes
None
2nd P Sensor None 1 Duct
Bldg
None
Tracking
RF/EF Ctrl Tracking 1
BldgPres
Position
Rem RF/EF Cap 25% 1 0-100%
English
Eng Units English SI Canada
SI Europe
Timeout 15 min 1 2-60 min
None
Passwords
Clear Alarm None 1 Lvl-1
Lvl-2
Fan 0 1 0-50000 hr
Mech Cool 0 1 0-50000 hr
Comp 1 0 1 0-50000 hr
Comp 2 0 1 0-50000 hr
Comp 3 0 1 0-50000 hr
Operating Hours Comp 4 0 1 0-50000 hr
Heating 0 1 0-50000 hr
Economizer 0 1 0-50000 hr
Bypass 0 1 0-50000 hr
Dehumidify 0 1 0-50000 hr
ERecovery 0 1 0-50000 hr
Service 0 min 1 0 - 240 min
Recirculate 3 min 1 2 - 60 min
Low DAT 3 min 1 2 - 60 min
Max MWU 90 min 1 0 - 240 min
Timer Settings
Bypass 120 min 1 0 - 300 min
Start Init 180 sec 1 0 - 240 sec
Min Exh On 120 sec 1 60 - 300 sec
Min Exh Off 120 sec 1 60 - 300 sec
OM 138 35
Table 7: Setup/Services Menus (Continued)
hh 1 00 - 23
Time mm 2 00 -59
ss 3 00 - 59
Time/Date Day - - Mon - Sun
dt 1 01-31
Date mon 2 Jan - Dec
year 3 1999-2155
BSP Propbd 1.0 “WC 1 0.1-30.0 “WC
Bldg Static P Setup BSP IntTime 10 sec 1 0-3600 sec
BSP Period 5 sec 1 1-3600 sec
Keypad
Spt Source Keypad 1
Tstat
Clg Propbd 8.0 °F 1 1.0-99.0 °F
Zone Temp Setup Htg Propbd 12.0 °F 1 1.0 99.0 °F
Clg IntTime 700 sec 1 0-3600 sec
Htg IntTime 500 sec 1 0-3600 sec
Period 60 sec 1 1-3600 sec
Auto
Lead Circuit #1 1 #1
#2
Cross Circ
CompCtrl Cross Circ 1
Lead Load
Compressor Setup Cond Fan1 Spt 0 °F 1 0-105 °F
Cond Fan2 Spt 55 °F 1 30-105 °F
Cond Fan3 Spt 65 °F 1 50-105 °F
Cond Fan4 Spt 75 °F 1 50-105 °F
Cond Fan Diff 10 °F 1 5-20 °F
Stage Time 5 min 1 5-60 min
Clg Propbd 30 °F 1 1-100 °F
Clg IntTime 60 sec 1 0-3600 sec
Chilled Water Setup
Clg Period 30 sec 1 1-3600 sec
Clg Propbd 30 °F 1 1-100 °F
Economizer Setup Clg IntTime 60 sec 1 0-3600 sec
Clg Period 30 sec 1 1-3600 sec
Wait Time 30 sec 1 5-180 sec
Modband 50% 1 10-100%
Max Step 5.0% 1 0.1-9.9%
DesignFlow Setup
DeadBand 6.0% 1 0.1-9.9%
LH Lvl Pos - 1 0.00-100.00%
RH Lvl Pos - 1 0.00-100.00%
OpenValve
F&BP Ctrl OpenValve 1
Mod Valve
Heating Setup F&BP Chgovr 37 °F 1 0-60 °F
Htg Propbd 20 °F 1 1-100 °F
Htg IntTime 120 sec 1 0-3600 sec
Htg Period 60 sec 1 1-3600 sec
36 OM 138
EWhl Propbd 30 °F 1 1-100 °F
Energy Rec Setup EWhl IntTime 100 sec 1 0-3600 sec
EWhl Period 30 sec 1 1-3600 sec
Occupied
Dehum Ctrl Occupied 1
Always
Minimum Stages 2 1 1-8
Dehum Setup Maximum Stages 4 1 1-8
DH Stage Time 10 min 1 0-60 min
Return
Sensor Loc Return 1
Space
No
Manual Control No 1
Yes
On
Discharge Fan Off 1
Off
On
RF/EF Fan Off 1
Off
On
Fan Operation Off 1
Off
Alarm
Alarm Normal 1
Normal
Close
OA Damper Auto 1 Auto
Manual Control Open
Close
Mod Cooling Auto 1 Auto
Open
Close
Mod Heating Auto 1 Auto
Open
Close
RF/EF Vanes Auto 1 Auto
Open
Slower
RF/EF VFD Auto 1 Auto
Faster
On
Off
Freeze Fast 1
Fast
Slow
Smoke Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Space Sensor Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Alarm Out Faults Return Sensor Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Disch Sensor Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Hi Return Tmp Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Hi Disch Tmp Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Lo Disch Tmp Fast 1 Same As Freeze
Fan Fail Fast 1 Same As Freeze
OA Dmpr Stuck Fast 1 Same As Freeze
OM 138 37
On
Off
Freeze Slow 1
Fast
Slow
OAT Sensor Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Space Sensor Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Return Sensor Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Ent Fan Sens Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Lo Airflow Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Heat Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Hi Pres-Ckt1 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Hi Pres-Ckt2 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Lo Pres-Ckt1 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Lo Pres-Ckt2 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Frost-Ckt1 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Alarm Out Problems Frost-Ckt2 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Comp #1 Alm Slow 1 Same As Freeze
PumpDown-Ckt1 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
PumpDown-Ckt2 Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Ckt1 Clg Ena Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Ckt2 Clg Ena Slow 1 Same As Freeze
GenC Clg Ena Slow 1 Same As Freeze
HtgB Htg Ena Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Ckt1 Comm Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
Ckt2 Comm Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
GenC Comm Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
HtgB Comm Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
ERecB Comm Fail Slow 1 Same As Freeze
On
Off
OA Dmpr Stuck Off 1
Fast
Slow
Airflow Switch Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
Alarm Out Warnings Dirty Filter Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
Dirty FnlFltr Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
Ckt1 H/W Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
Ckt2 H/W Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
GenC H/W Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
HtgB H/W Off 1 Same As OA Dmpr Stuck
Hi Discharge Alm 170 °F 1 90 - 250 °F
Alarm Limits Lo Discharge Alm 40 °F 1 20 - 50 °F
Hi Return Alm 120 °F 1 90 - 150 °F
Active Alarms The “Range” column in the table lists all possible values for
Menus in the Active Alarms category contain alarm informa- each item. The factory settings for the adjustable parameters
tion for up to 4 active alarms. Table 8 on page 40 lists all are shown in the “Factory Default Value” column. The fol-
menus and items in the Active Alarms group or category. lowing are brief descriptions of the Active Alarms category
38 OM 138
menus and items. For detailed information regarding alarm Active Alarm 3
handling, refer to “Alarm Monitoring” on page 51 and
The Active Alarm 3 menu provides details regarding the
“Alarm Control” on page 91.
third highest priority active alarm.
Active Alarm 1
Alarm Name. Alarm Name= is a status only item that iden-
tifies the name of Active Alarm 3.
highest priority active alarm.
Alarm Name. Alarm Name= is a status only item that iden- Alarm Type. Alarm Type= is a status only item that identi-
tifies the name of Active Alarm 1. fies the alarm type (fault, problem or warning) of Active
Alarm 3.
Alarm Type. Alarm Type= is a status only item that identi-
fies the alarm type (fault, problem or warning) of Active Alarm Date and Time. This is a status only item that indi-
Alarm 1. cates the date and time of occurrence of Active Alarm 3.
Alarm Date and Time. This is a status only item that indi- Active Alarm 4
cates the date and time of occurrence of Active Alarm 1.
Active Alarm 2 fourth highest priority active alarm.
The Active Alarm 2 menu provides details regarding the sec-
ond highest priority active alarm.
tifies the name of Active Alarm 4.
tifies the name of Active Alarm 2. Alarm Type. Alarm Type= is a status only item that identi-
fies the alarm type (fault, problem or warning) of Active
Alarm Type. Alarm Type= is a status only item that identi- Alarm 4.
fies the alarm type (fault, problem or warning) of Active
Alarm 2. Alarm Date and Time. This is a status only item that indi-
Alarm Date and Time. This is a status only item that indi-
OM 138 39
Table 8: Active Alarm Menus
None
Freeze (Fault)
Smoke (Fault)
Space Sensor (Fault)
Return Sensor (Fault)
Disch Sensor (Fault)
Hi Return Tmp (Fault)
Hi Disch Tmp (Fault)
Lo Disch Tmp (Fault)
Fan Fail (Fault)
OA Dmpr Stuck (Fault)
Freeze (Problem)
OAT Sensor (Problem)
Space Sensor (Problem)
Return Sensor (Problem)
Ent Fan Sens (Problem)
Lo Airflow (Problem)
Heat Fail (Problem)
Hi Pres-Ckt1 (Problem)
Hi Pres-Ckt2 (Problem)
Lo Pres-Ckt1 (Problem)
Lo Pres-Ckt2 (Problem)
Frost-Ckt1 (Problem)
Alarm Name - - Frost-Ckt2 (Problem)
Comp #1 Alm (Problem)
Active Alarm 1
PumpDown-Ckt1 (Problem)
PumpDown-Ckt2 (Problem)
Ckt1 Clg Ena (Problem)
Ckt2 Clg Ena (Problem)
GenC Clg Ena (Problem)
HtgB Htg Ena (Problem)
Ckt1 Comm Fail (Problem)
Ckt2 Comm Fail (Problem)
GenC Comm Fail (Problem)
HtgB Comm Fail (Problem)
ERecB Comm Fail (Problem)
OA Dmpr Stuck (Warning)
Airflow Switch (Warning)
Dirty Filter (Warning)
Drty FnlFltr (Warning)
Ckt1 H/W (Warning)
Ckt2 H/W (Warning)
GenC H/W (Warning)
HtgB H/W (Warning)
-
Fault-Active
Alarm Type - -
Problem-Active
Warning-Active
Alarm Date and Time - - dd-mmm-yy/hh:mm:ss
40 OM 138
Table 8: Active Alarm Menus (Continued)
Alarm Name - - Same As Active Alm 1
-
Fault-Active
Active Alarm 2 Alarm Type - -
Problem- Active
Warning- Active
-
Fault- Active
Problem- Active
Warning- Active
-
Fault- Active
Problem- Active
Warning- Active
OM 138 41
Previous Alarms Alarm Name. Alarm Name= is a status only item that iden-
tifies the name of Previous Alarm 1.
Menus in the Previous Alarms category contain alarm infor-
mation for up to 4 previous alarms. Table 9 lists all menus Alarm Type. Alarm Type= is a status only item that identi-
and items in the Previous Alarms group or category. The fies the alarm type (fault, problem or warning) of Previous
“Range” column in the table lists all possible values for each Alarm 1.
item. The factory settings for the adjustable parameters are
shown in the “Factory Default Value” column. The follow- Alarm Date and Time. This is a status only item that indi-
ing are brief descriptions of the Previous Alarms category cates the date and time of occurrence of Previous Alarm 1.
menus and items. For detailed information regarding alarm
handling, refer to “Alarm Monitoring” on page 51 and Previous Alarm 2 through Previous Alarm 8
“Alarm Control” on page 91.
The Previous Alarm 2 through the Previous Alarm 8 menus
Previous Alarm 1 provide details regarding the second through eighth most
The Previous Alarm 1 menu provides details regarding the recently cleared previous alarm. The description of these
most recently cleared previous alarm. menus is identical to Previous Alarm 1.
Table 9: Previous Alarm Menus

-
Fault- Clear
Previous Alarm 1 Alarm Type - -
Problem- Clear
Warning- Clear
Alarm Date and Time - dd-mmm-yy/hh:mm:ss
Previous Alarm 2 Alarm Type - - Same As Previous Alm 1
42 OM 138
Operator’s Guide
The following “Operator’s Guide” sections provide informa- the closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with
tion regarding the day-to-day operation of the MicroTech II compressorized cooling, the percentage value changes incre-
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. Topics covered are such mentally based on the number operating cooling stages.
common tasks as scheduling, displaying and clearing alarms,
and setting the controller for manual operation. Programma- Htg Capacity
ble parameters that affect the operation being described are Htg Capacity= is a status item which indicates the percent-
listed at the beginning of each applicable sub-section. The age of the unit maximum heating capacity currently operat-
factory default values for these parameters are shown in ing. When the unit is equipped with modulating heat, 0-
italic letters. 100% is displayed as the heating valve actuator strokes from
For detailed information regarding the control processes and the closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with
their programmable parameters, refer to “Description of staged heat, the percentage value changes incrementally
Operation” on page 61. based on the number operating heating stages
Clg Status
Determining Unit Status
Clg Status= is a status item which indicates whether or not
The System menu includes several parameters that can be
cooling (economizer and/or mechanical) is currently
used to determine the overall status of the unit. There are
allowed. If cooling is disabled, the reason is indicated. The
five key items in this menu that summarize the current oper-
following are descriptions of the various “Clg Status” states.
ating condition of the unit. These are: UnitStatus=, Clg
Capacity=, Htg Capacity=, Clg Status=, and Htg Status= All Clg
and are described in the following sections. The Clg Status= parameter indicates “All Clg” when both of
UnitStatus the following conditions are true:
The UnitStatus= parameter in the System menu is very use- 1. The unit is equipped with an economizer and the out-
ful because the item summarizes the overall operating condi- door air is suitable for free cooling (OA Ambient=
tion of the unit. Each of the possible conditions is referred to parameter in the OA Damper menu indicates “Low”).
as an “operating state”. The following are the possible oper- 2. The unit is equipped with chilled-water cooling or the
ating states displayed by the UnitStatus= parameter. unit is equipped with compressorized cooling and the
outdoor air is warm enough to allow compressor opera-
tion (OA Temp= parameter in the Temperatures menu
l Off
has risen above the OATComp Lock= parameter by
l Calib
more that the OATLock Diff= setting in the Zone Cool-
l Startup
ing menu).
l Recirc
l Fan Only In this state the unit uses the economizer, mechanical cooling
l Econo or both as required to maintain the cooling set points.
l Cooling Econo
l MWU
l Heating The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Econo” when both of
l Min DAT the following conditions are true:
l UnocEcon 1. The unit is equipped with an economizer and the out-
l UnocClg door air is suitable for free cooling (OA Ambient=
l UnocHtg parameter in the OA Damper menu indicates “Low”).
l Man Ctrl 2. The unit is equipped with compressorized cooling and
the outdoor air is too cool to allow compressor operation
The unit makes transitions between these operating states as (OA Temp= parameter in the Temperatures menu has
conditions change. For detailed information regarding these dropped below the OATComp Lock= setting in the Zone
states, refer to “Operating States and Sequences” on page 61. Cooling menu).
In this state the unit only uses the economizer to maintain the
Clg Capacity cooling set points. Compressor operation is disabled.
Clg Capacity= is a status item which indicates the percent-
age of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operat- Mech Clg
ing. When the unit is equipped with chilled water cooling, 0- The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Mech Clg” when both
100% is displayed as the cooling valve actuator strokes from of the following conditions are true:
OM 138 43
1. The unit is not equipped with an economizer or the out- Off Net
door air is not suitable for free cooling (OA Ambient=
The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off Net” when cool-
parameter in the OA Damper menu indicates “High”).
ing is disabled by a network signal affecting the Appl Mode=
2. The unit is equipped with chilled-water cooling or the parameter in the System menu. This is the case when the
unit is equipped with compressorized cooling and the Appl Mode= parameter is set to either “Heat Only” or “Fan
outdoor air is warm enough to allow compressor opera- Only.” All cooling is disabled during the “Off Net” state.
tion (OA Temp= parameter in the Temperatures menu
has risen above the OATComp Lock= parameter by Off None
more that the OATLock Diff= setting in the Zone Cool- The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off None” when the
ing menu). unit is equipped with no cooling of any kind.
In this state the unit uses mechanical cooling to maintain the
cooling set points. Economizer operation is disabled, and the Htg Status
outdoor air damper is maintained at the Eff Min OA Pos= Htg Status= is a status item which indicates whether or not
value. heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the rea-
Off Amb son is indicated. The following are descriptions of the vari-
ous “Htg Status” states.
The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off Amb” when both
of the following conditions are true: Htg Ena
1. The unit is not equipped with an economizer or outdoor The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Htg Ena” when the
air is not suitable for free cooling (OA Ambient= param- unit is equipped with some kind of heating and the outdoor
eter in the OA Damper menu indicates “High”). air is cool enough to allow heating operation and heat is not
2. The unit is equipped with compressorized cooling and disabled for some other reason. (OA Temp= parameter in the
the outdoor air is too cool to allow compressor operation Temperatures menu has dropped below the OATHtg Lock=
(OA Temp= in the Temperatures menu has dropped parameter by more that the OATLock Diff= setting in the
below the OATComp Lock= setting in the Zone Cooling Zone Heating menu). In this state the unit uses the heat as
menu). required to maintain the heating set points.
In this state both economizer and mechanical cooling opera- Off Amb
tion is disabled.
The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off Amb” when the
For applications that use an economizer, the “Off Amb” state unit is equipped with heat and the outdoor air is too warm to
should not occur if the economizer changeover and mechani- allow heating operation (OA Temp= parameter in the Tem-
cal cooling lockout set points are adjusted properly. If it does peratures menu has risen above the OATHtg Lock= setting in
occur, it may indicate a problem with the enthalpy control the Zone Heating menu). In this state heating operation is
device. disabled.
Off Alm
Off Alm
The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off Alm” when cool-
The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off Alm” when heat-
ing related alarms cause all cooling circuits to be completely
ing related alarms cause all heating to be completely dis-
disabled and economizer operation is not available. For
abled. For detailed information regarding heating alarms and
detailed information regarding cooling alarms and their
their effect on the unit operation, refer to “Alarm Control” on
effect on the unit operation, Refer to “Alarm Control” on
page 91. All heating is disabled during the “Off Alm” state.
page 91. All cooling is disabled during the “Off Alm” state.
Off Sw Off Sw
The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off Sw” when the The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off Sw” when the
field cooling enable terminals 101 to 105 on terminal block field heating enable terminals 101 to 106 on terminal block
TB2 in the main control panel are not made (binary input TB2 in the main control panel are not made (binary input
MCB-BI3 is off). Refer to the “Manual Cooling and Heating MCB-BI4 off). Refer to the “Manual Cooling and Heating
Enable/Disable” section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Roof- Enable/Disable” section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Roof-
top Unit Controller. All cooling is disabled during the “Off top Unit Controller. Heating is disabled during the “Off Sw”
Sw” state. state.
Off Man Off Man
The Clg Status= parameter indicates “Off Man” when cool- The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off Man” when heat-
ing is disabled via the Ctrl Mode= parameter in the System ing is disabled via the Ctrl Mode= parameter in the System
menu. This occurs when the Ctrl Mode= parameter is set to menu. This occurs when the Ctrl Mode= parameter is set to
either “Heat Only” or “Fan Only.” All cooling is disabled either “Cool Only” or “Fan Only.” Heating is disabled dur-
during the “Off Man” state. ing the “Off Man” state.
44 OM 138
WARNING
Electric shock and moving machinery hazard. Can cause personal injury or death.
When the unit is in any Off operating state, power is not removed from the unit controller or components.
Remove power by turning off the disconnect-switch before servicing line voltage equipment or entering the
unit.
Off Net Cool Only

The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off Net” when heat- When the Control Mode is set to “Cool Only”, cooling oper-
ing is disabled by a network signal affecting the Appl Mode= ation is allowed to operate to maintain the cooling set points.
parameter in the System menu. This occurs when the Appl Heating operation is disabled (Htg Status= is “Off Man”).
Mode= parameter is set to either “Cool Only” or “Fan Only.” Heat Only
Heating is disabled during the “Off Net” state. When the Control Mode is set to “Heat Only”, heating oper-
Off None ation is allowed to operate to maintain the heating set points.
Cooling operation is disabled (Clg Status= is “Off Man”).
The Htg Status= parameter indicates “Off None” when the Fan Only
unit is equipped with no heating.
When the Control Mode is set to “Fan Only”, the fans are
allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is dis-
Auto/Manual Operation abled (Clg Status= and Htg Status= are “Off Man”).
The System menus includes two parameters that determine Auto

whether cooling, heating, both cooling and heating or neither When the Control Mode is set to “Auto”, the heat/cool, cool
are enabled during unit operation. These are the Ctrl Mode= only, heat only, and fan only decision is determined by the
and Appl Mode= parameters. The Occupancy menu includes Appl Mode= parameter, which is set via a network signal as
five parameters that relate to the occupied/unoccupied condi- described below. The Appl Mode= parameter has no effect
tion (start/stop) of the unit. These are the Occupancy=, Occ on unit operation unless the Control Mode is set to “Auto.”
Mode=, Occ Src=, Bypass Time=, and Emerg Override=
parameters. These are described in the following sections.
Appl Mode
Table 11: Programmable Parameters
Ctrl Mode
Keypad/Display ID
Table 10: Programmable Parameters Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name System Appl Mode= Heat/Cool Application Mode
Menu Name Item Name
System Ctrl Mode= Auto Control Mode The unit heating and cooling can be set up for automatic
heat/cool, heat only, cool only or fan only operation based on
a network signal by setting the Ctrl Mode= parameter to
The unit cooling and heating can be set up for automatic “Auto.” With the Ctrl Mode= parameter set to “Auto”, the
heat/cool, cool only, heat only, fan only, or network cool/heat heat/cool, cool only, heat only, and fan only decision is deter-
operation by setting the Control Mode. The unit can also be mined by the Application Mode. The Application Mode is
manually disabled via the Control Mode. The following are set by a network signal. The following sections describe the
descriptions of the six available Control Mode selections. five available Application Mode selections.
Off Note: The Application Mode has no effect on the unit
operation unless the Ctrl Mode= parameter is set to
When the Control Mode is set to “Off”, the UnitStatus= is
“Auto.”
“Off Man” and the unit is completely disabled.
Off
Heat Cool
When the Application Mode is set to “Off”, the UnitStatus=
When the Control Mode is set to “Heat/Cool”, both cooling is “Off Net” and the unit is completely disabled, including
and heating operation are allowed to operate as required to unoccupied heating (night set back) and unoccupied cooling
maintain the cooling and heating set points. (night set up) operation.
OM 138 45
Heat/Cool tion is activated. Refer to “Unoccupied Control” on page 89.
When the Application Mode is set to “Heat/Cool”, both The unit is in the unoccupied mode if all of the following
cooling and heating operation are allowed to operate as conditions are true:
required to maintain the cooling and heating set points. 1. The Occ Mode= parameter is set to either “Unocc” or
Cool Only “Auto” and any field supplied external time clock or a
tenant override switch contacts are open across termi-
When the Application Mode is set to “Cool Only”, cooling
nals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block (TB2).
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the
For detailed information refer to “External Time Clock
cooling set points. Heating operation is disabled (Htg Sta-
or Tenant Override (Non-Timed)” in IM 696, MicroTech
tus= is “Off Net”).
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
Heat Only 2. The Occ Mode= parameter is set to either “Unocc” or
When the Application Mode is set to “Heat Only”, heating “Auto” and the Bypass Time= parameter indicates 0
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the time.
heating set points. Cooling operation is disabled (Clg Sta- 3. The Occ Mode= parameter is not set to “Occ.”
tus= is “Off Net”). 4. The Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto” and the unit
Fan Only internal time clock schedule, optimal start function, one
time event schedule, and optional network schedule all
When the Application Mode is set to “Fan Only”, the fans
indicate an unoccupied period.
are allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is
disabled (Clg Status= and Htg Status= are “Off Net”). Note: The unit reverts to unoccupied mode if the calibrate
function is active. For more information on cali-
Occupancy brate mode, refer to “Calibrate Mode” on page 56
Occupancy= is a status item which indicates whether the
unit is in an occupied or unoccupied mode of operation. The Bypass
following are descriptions of the various “Occupancy” The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Bypass” when the
states. unit is in the bypass mode. In the bypass mode the unit starts
Occ up and function as it does in occupied mode.1 The unit is in
the bypass mode if the Bypass Time= parameter is set to a
The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” when the unit is non-zero value. For details regarding how the Bypass Time=
in the occupied mode. In this mode, the unit generally starts is set, refer to “Bypass Time (Tenant Override)” on page 48
and runs continuously, cooling and heating as required to
maintain the occupied temperature set points.1 The unit is in Occ Mode
the occupied mode if any of the following conditions are
true: Table 12: Programmable Parameters
1. A field supplied external time clock or a tenant override Keypad/Display ID
switch signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
closed across terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field ter-
minal block TB2 (binary input MCB-BI1 on). For Occupancy Occ Mode= Auto Occupancy Mode
detailed information refer to “External Time Clock or
Tenant Override (Non-Timed)” in IM 696, MicroTech The unit can be set up for automatic or manual occu-
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. pied/unoccupied operation by setting the Occupancy Mode.
2. The Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Occ.” The following are descriptions of the four available Occu-
3. The Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto” and the unit pancy Mode selections.
internal time clock schedule, optimal start function, one Auto
time event schedule, or an optional network schedule
indicates an occupied period. When the Occupancy Mode is set to “Auto”, the unit oper-
ates automatically. This means that the Occupancy= parame-
Unocc ter changes automatically between “Occ” and Unocc”. The
The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” when the unit Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” and the unit starts if
is in the unoccupied mode. In the unoccupied mode, the unit either the unit internal time clock schedule, optimal start
is off and remains off unless unoccupied cooling (night set function, one time event schedule, or an optional network
up or purge) or unoccupied heating (night set back) opera- schedule indicate an occupied period1. The Occupancy=
parameter indicates “Unocc” and the unit stops if the unit
1. The unit will not start regardless of the occupancy mode internal time clock schedule, optimal start function, one time
when the UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Sw”, “Man event schedule, and an optional network schedule all indi-
Ctrl”, “Off Alm”, “Off Net”, or “Off Man”. For a description of
these operating states, refer to “Operating State Descrip-
cate an unoccupied period.
tions” on page 61. Exceptions:
46 OM 138
1. The Occupancy= parameter is “Occ” and the unit starts Bypass
if a field supplied external time clock or a tenant over-
When the Occupancy Mode is set to “Bypass”, the Bypass
ride switch signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is
Time= parameter is set to the Bypass Time Increment= value.
closed across terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field ter-
The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Bypass” and the unit
minal block TB2 (binary input MCB-BI1 on)1. For
starts and operates as in the occupied mode until the Bypass
detailed information refer to “External Time Clock or
Time= parameter times out. Any scheduling commands are
Tenant Override (Non-Timed)” in IM 696, MicroTech
prevented from shutting down the unit while the bypass
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
operation is active.1
2. The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Bypass” and the
unit starts if the Bypass Time= parameter is set to a non- Note: Once the Occupancy Mode is set to “Bypass” and
zero value1. the Bypass Time= parameter is set to the Bypass
Time Increment= value, the Occupancy Mode auto-
3. The Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” and the
matically reverts to the “Auto” setting.
unit stops if the Calibrate function is activated. Refer to
“Calibrate Mode” on page 56. Exception:
4. While the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc”,
the unit can start and operate in the unoccupied heating
unit stops if the Calibrate function is activated. Refer to
(night set back) or the unoccupied cooling (night set up
“Calibrate Mode” on page 56.
or purge) mode1. Refer to “Unoccupied Control” on
page 89. Occ Src
Occ Occ Src= is a status item which indicates the input source or
When the Occupancy Mode is set to “Occ”, the Occupancy= function that is responsible for setting the Occupancy=
parameter indicates “Occ” and the unit starts and runs con- parameter to “Occ.” There are a number of things that can
tinuously in the occupied mode1. Any scheduling commands change the Occupancy= parameter to “Occ” and the Occ
are prevented from shutting down the unit. Src= parameter is very helpful in determining which func-
tion has started the unit.
Exception:
None
unit stops if the Calibrate function is activated. Refer to The Occ Src= parameter indicates “None” when the Occu-
“Calibrate Mode” on page 56. pancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” or “Bypass.”
Unocc Int Sched
When the Occupancy Mode is set to “Unocc”, the Occu- The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int Sched” when the
pancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” and the unit is off and Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the unit inter-
remains off unless unoccupied cooling (night set up or nal schedule or one event schedule indicating an occupied
purge) or unoccupied heating (night set back) operation is period. Refer to “Scheduling” on page 48.
activated. Refer to “Unoccupied Control” on page 891. Net Sched
Exceptions: The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Net Sched” when the
1. The Occupancy= parameter changes to “Occ” and the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a network
unit starts if a field supplied external time clock or a ten- schedule indicating an occupied period.
ant override switch signal in the form of a set of dry Occ Mode
contacts is closed across terminals 101 and 102 on the
unit field terminal block TB2 (binary input MCB-BI1 The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Occ Mode” when the
on)1. For detailed information refer to “External Time Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the Occu-
Clock or Tenant Override (Non-Timed)” in IM 696, pancy Mode being manually set to “Occ.”
MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. Remote Sw
2. The Occupancy= parameter changes to “Bypass” and
The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Remote Sw” when the
the unit starts if the Bypass Time= parameter is set to a
Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a field sup-
non-zero value1. plied external time clock or a tenant override switch signal in
the form of a set of dry contacts is closed across terminals
1. The unit will not start regardless of the occupancy mode
when the UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Sw”, “Man
101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block TB2 (binary
Ctrl”, “Off Alm”, “Off Net”, or “Off Man”. For a description of input MCB-BI1 on). For detailed information refer to
these operating states, refer to “Operating State Descrip- “External Time Clock or Tenant Override (Non-Timed)” in
tions” on page 61. IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
OM 138 47
Bypass Time (Tenant Override) trolled by any active scheduling function (internal time clock
schedule, optimal start function, one time event schedule, or
Table 13: Programmable Parameters an optional network schedule). If there is no active schedul-
ing function, the unit remains in the unoccupied mode. For
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name detailed information refer to “External Time Clock or Tenant
Menu Name Item Name Override (Non-Timed)” in IM 696, MicroTech Applied Roof-
Occ Mode= Auto Occupancy Mode top Unit Controller.
Occupancy
Bypass Time= 0 min Bypass Timer Operator Override
Timer Settings Bypass= 120 min Bypass Time Increment
The Bypass Timer can be manually set. When the Bypass
Timer is set to a non-zero value, the unit starts and runs in
There are two types of tenant override functions: timed and the bypass mode regardless of any scheduling features.1 The
non-timed. Timed override uses the Bypass Timer and unit stops when the timer expires. The Bypass Timer can be
Bypass Time Increment to place the unit into bypass mode. set from 0-300 minutes.
Non-timed override uses a simple field supplied SPST
switch to override unoccupied operation. Note: If the Bypass Timer remaining time is larger than
the Bypass Time Increment, pressing the tenant
Timed Tenant Override
override button on the space sensor has no effect. If
The tenant-override button provided with the optional zone the Bypass Timer remaining time is less than the
temperature sensor packages is used to override unoccupied Bypass Time Increment, pressing the tenant over-
operation for a preprogrammed time period. This time period ride button resets the Bypass Timer to the Bypass
is set with the Bypass Time Increment. This value can be Time Increment value.
adjusted from 0 to 300 minutes (default is 120 minutes).
When an occupant presses and releases the tenant-override Emergency Override
button on the zone temperature sensor (ZNT1), the Bypass
Timer is set equal to the Bypass Time Increment. (The but-
ton must be held for at least 1 second but not more than 30 Keypad/Display ID
seconds.) The unit then starts and runs in the bypass mode Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
which is the same as occupied mode except that it is tempo-
Emergency Override Mode
rary.1 The Bypass Timer begins timing out and the unit runs Occupancy Emerg Override= Norm
Flag
until the timer expires. If the tenant override button is
pressed again while the unit is operating in bypass mode, the
Bypass Timer is reset to the Bypass Time Increment and the The unit can be shutdown by setting the Emergency Over-
unit continues to operate. For example, assume that the ride Mode Flag. When the Emergency Override Mode Flag
Bypass Time Increment is 120 minutes. One press of the is set to “Off”, the UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off
override button provides at 120 minutes of unit operation. If Net” and the unit remains off regardless of any time schedule
the button is pressed again 60 minutes later, the Bypass or other occupied or unoccupied start commands. The only
Timer is reset to 120 minutes, and a total of 180 minutes of way a unit can be restarted is to set Emergency Override
uninterrupted operation results. Mode Flag back to “Norm.” The Emergency Override Mode
Flag can either be set manually at the unit keypad or via a
Note: The same operation occurs if, instead of pressing network signal.
the override button on a zone temperature sensor,
the Occupancy Mode is set to “Bypass.” Once set to
“Bypass”, the Occupancy Mode automatically
Scheduling
reverts to the “Auto” setting once the Bypass Timer The rooftop unit can be scheduled for operation by using the
is set to the Bypass Time Increment. following three methods:
Non-Timed Tenant Override 1) Unit internal time scheduling functions
If an field supplied external time clock or a tenant override 2) External time clock function
switch signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is closed 3) Network time scheduling function
across terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block Provided the unit is not locally or remotely disabled, the unit
TB2 (binary input MCB-BI1 on), the unit is placed into operates when any of these scheduling functions is calling
occupied mode1. When this switch is open, the unit is con- for occupied operation. Conversely, the unit enters the unoc-
cupied mode when all of these scheduling functions are call-
1. The unit will not start regardless of the occupancy mode
when the UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Sw”, “Man
ing for unoccupied operation. Therefore, any unused
Ctrl”, “Off Alm”, “Off Net”, or “Off Man”. For a description of scheduling functions should be set for continuous unoccu-
these operating states, refer to “Operating State Descrip- pied operation. Refer also to“Auto/Manual Operation” on
tions” on page 61. page 45.
48 OM 138
The next four sections: “Setting Controller Date and Time”, Minute. The schedule shown would cause the unit to start up
“Internal Daily Scheduling”, “Holiday Scheduling”, and One at 6:30 a.m. and shut down at 6:00 p.m. every Monday, Tues-
Event Scheduling” describe functions related to the internal day and Wednesday.
unit scheduling functions. These are followed by a section
describing the optimal start function which can be use with Figure 5: Daily Schedule Fields
internal scheduling and network scheduling. This is followed
Menu Line
by two sections that describe the external time scheduling **Edit Mode
Item Line Being Edited Mon= 06:30 - 18:00
and network time scheduling functions. Tue= 06:30 - 18:00
Wed= 06:30 - 18:00
Setting Controller Date and Time
Stop Minute
Table 15: Programmable Parameters Stop Hour
Keypad/Display ID Start Minute

Parameter Name Start Hour
Menu Name Item Name
Time= hh:mm:ss Current Time For continuous unit operation, the schedule fields can be set
Time/Date Day= ddd Current Day to “00:00-23:59.” For no unit operation for the entire day, the
Date= dd-mm-yyyy Current Date schedule fields can be set to “00:00-00:00” (this is the
default setting).
The MicroTech II controller uses the date and time to exe-
cute its internal scheduling functions. Once set, the battery Holiday Scheduling
backed internal time clock keeps the current time regardless
of whether or not power is being supplied to the unit.
The time of day can be set by entering the hour (00-23), Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
minute (00-59), and second (00-59) into three fields of the Menu Name Item Name
Current Time. Note that MicroTech II uses “military” time. Daily Schedule Holiday= 00:00 - 00:00 Holiday Schedule
The day of the week is not adjustable. The Current Day is set
Holiday Schedule Hol *= mmm dt - mmm dt Holiday Period
automatically by the controller based on the Current Date.
The current date can be set by entering the date (00-31),
month (01-12) and year (1999-2155) into the three fields of Special operating hours can be scheduled for up to 16 holi-
the Current Date. day periods during the year by using the holiday scheduling
feature. (The wildcard character “*” in the above table could
Internal Daily Scheduling be any number between 1 and 16.) Whenever a holiday
period occurs, the controller uses the Holiday Schedule start
Table 16: Programmable Parameters and stop time for the period. For example, assume that
Christmas Eve occurs on a Thursday. The building is shut
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name down on both Christmas Eve and Christmas Day, but oper-
Menu Name Item Name ates normally on the weekend. This holiday period would be
Mon= 00:00 - 00:00 Monday Schedule scheduled by setting the Holiday Schedule to “00:00-00:00”
Tue= 00:00 - 00:00 Tuesday Schedule and setting the Holiday Period to “Dec 24 - Dec 25.”
Wed= 00:00 - 00:00 Wednesday Schedule If any of the 16 holiday periods are not required, the Holiday
Thu= 00:00 - 00:00 Thursday Schedule Period is set to “N/A - N/A.”
Daily Schedule
Fri= 00:00 - 00:00 Friday Schedule
Sat= 00:00 - 00:00 Saturday Schedule
One Event Scheduling
Sun= 00:00 - 00:00 Sunday Schedule
Hol= 00:00 - 00:00 Holiday Schedule
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
When the Occ Mode= parameter, described in “Auto/Man- Menu Name Item Name
ual Operation” on page 45, is set to “Auto”, and the unit is One Event Beginning
not disabled for other reasons, it starts and stops according to Beg= mmm dd @ hh:mm
Date/Time
the controller internal schedule. One start and one stop time One Event
One Event Ending
can be set for each day of the week and for designated holi- End= mmm dd @ hh:mm
Date/Time
days. An example of how to use the keypad to enter or mod-
ify a schedule is given in “Getting Started” on page 6. The unit can be scheduled to operate during a specified
As shown in Figure 5, each daily schedule has four adjust- period by using the one event scheduling feature. During the
able fields: Start Hour, Start Minute, Stop Hour, and Stop specified period defined by the One Event Beginning
OM 138 49
Date/Time and One Event Ending Date/Time parameters the Flag is set to “Yes”, the controller calculates an early start
unit starts up and runs continuously regardless of any other time before each normally scheduled start. The controller
time scheduling functions. For example, assume that a space uses the start history, outdoor air temperature, and space
served by the unit is occupied for a special event on March temperature to determine when the unit should start. The unit
12 from 5:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. when the normal time may be started by the optimal start function up to four hours
scheduling has the unit shut off after 4:00 p.m. on that date. before the scheduled start time.
This event can be accounted for by setting the One Event
Beginning Date/Time to “Mar 12 @ 17:00” and the One If the Ctrl Temp= parameter, which is the temperature input
Event Ending Date/Time to “Mar 12 @ 22:00.” If a one- selected by the CtrlTemp Src= parameter, is below the Effec-
event schedule is not required, the One Event Beginning tive Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
Date/Time and One Event Ending Date/Time parameters are Enable Deadband setting, optimal start operation is based on
both set to “N/A.” the optimal start heating parameters. If the Ctrl Temp= value
is above the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more
Optimal Start than half Cooling Enable Deadband setting, optimal start
The optimal start function can only be used with the unit operation is based on the optimal start cooling parameters.
internal time schedule or a network supplied time schedule Unit startup occurs at the scheduled start time if the Ctrl
that indicates “time-to-occupancy”. When the Optimal Start Temp= value is in between these limits.
Table 19: Programmable Parameter

Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Eff Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF Effective Cooling Enable Set Point
Zone Cooling
Clg Deadband= 1.0 ºF Cooling Enable Deadband
Eff Htg Spt= 75.0 ºF Effective Heating Enable Set Point
Zone Heating
Htg Deadband= 1.0 ºF Heating Enable Deadband
Optimal Start= No Optimal Start Flag
Auto Update= Yes Automatic Update Flag
Htg Rate= 0.4 ºF/min Heating Rate
Htg OAT= 35.0 ºF Heating Outdoor Air Temperature
Optimal Start
Htg Zero OAT= 0 ºF Heating Outdoor Air Temperature Zero
Clg Rate= 0.4 ºF/min Cooling Rate
Clg OAT= 85.0 ºF Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature
Clg Zero OAT= 100 ºF Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature Zero
When heating is required, a “heating rate” that varies with the outdoor air temperature is calculated using the formula:
Current OA Temperature – Heating Outdoor Air Temperature Zero

Calculated Heating Rate = Heating Rate × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Heating Outdoor Air Temperature – Heating Outdoor Air Temperature Zero
The minutes before occupancy are calculated based on the following formula:
Current Space Temperature – Effective Heating Enable Set Point

Minutes Before Occupancy = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calculated Heating Rate
When cooling is required, a “cooling rate” that varies with the outdoor air temperature is calculated using the formula:
Current OA Temperature – Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature Zero

Calculated Cooling Rate = Cooling Rate × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature – Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature Zero
The minutes before occupancy are on the following formula:
Current Space Temperature – Effective Cooling Enable Set Point

Minutes Before Occupancy = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calculated Cooling Rate
If the Automatic Update Flag is set to “Yes”, the controller they are used and the temperature change is significant.
revises the optimal start parameters after each start in which
50 OM 138
External Time Scheduling Alarm Monitoring
An external time clock can be used to schedule unit opera-
tion. This is accomplished by a field supplied external time
About Alarms
clock signal in the form of a set of dry contacts wired across The MicroTech II Applied Rooftop Unit Controller is pro-
terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block TB2 grammed to monitor the unit for alarm conditions. Alarm
(binary input MCB-BI1). In this case, all internal daily conditions are categorized in three types: “faults”, “prob-
schedules should be set to “00:00-00:00” (default setting). lems”, and “warnings.” In general, “faults” are more serious
For details on how to connect an external time clock, refer to than “problems” and “problems” more serious that “warn-
“Field Wiring” in IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit ings.” Therefore, “faults” are assigned a higher priority than
Controller. “problems” and “problems” a higher priority than “warn-
ings.” Within the three types, the alarms are prioritized.
Network Time Scheduling Some alarms require manual clearing and some are cleared
A network time schedule can be used to operate the unit. In automatically. Table 20 summarizes all alarms, listing them
this case, all internal daily schedules should be set to “00:00- by type and priority, and listing the required clearing
00:00” (default setting). Scheduling a unit via a network sig- method.
nal is supported through optional communication modules If an alarm condition occurs, the controller displays a mes-
(Ethernet-BACnet, MSTP-BACnet and LonWorks). sage and executes the appropriate action to make the unit
fail-safe. The controller displays a local message on the unit
keypad/display and a remote indication on a Remote Alarm
Output (binary output MCB-BO4) wired to terminals for
field connection. For the meaning of each alarm, see “Alarm
Control” on page 91.
Table 20: Unit Alarms

Alarm Type Alarm Message Indication Alarm Reset
Freeze Freezestat condition while SAF on Manual
Smoke Smoke detected by SAF and/or RAF smoke detector Manuala
Space Sensor Space temp sensor failure when CtrlTemp Src= parameter is set to “Space” Manual
Return Sensor RAT sensor failure Manual
Disch Sensor DAT sensor failure Manual
Fault
Hi Return Tmp RAT exceeded the Hi Return Tmp setting Manual
Hi Disch Tmp DAT exceeded the Hi Disch Tmp setting Manual
Lo Disch Tmp DAT fell below the Lo Disch Tmp setting Manual
Fan Fail Airflow not sensed by PC7 after SAF was started Manual
OA Dmpr Stuck OA Dampers < 50% open after Startup (100% OA units only) Manual
OM 138 51
Table 20: Unit Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Type Alarm Message Indication Alarm Reset
Freeze Freezestat tripped while SAF was off Automatic
OAT Sensor OAT sensor failure when CtrlTemp Src= parameter not set to “OAT” Automatic
Space Sensor Space temp sensor failure on unit with RAT sensor Automatic
Return Sensor RAT sensor failure CtrlTemp Src= parameter not set to “Return” Automatic
Ent Fan Sensor EFT sensor failure Automatic
Lo Airflow Excessive temperature rise sensed across heat section on single stage heat unit Manual
Heat Fail Gas furnace safety lockout condition occurred Automaticb
Hi Pres-Ckt1 HP1 or HP3 open indicating ckt # 1 high refrigerant pressure Manual
Hi Pres-Ckt2 HP2 or HP4 open indicating ckt # 2 high refrigerant pressure Manual
Lo Pres-Ckt1 LP1 remained opened after ckt #1 solenoid valve open Automaticc
Lo Pres-Ckt2 LP2 remained opened after ckt #2 solenoid valve open Automaticc
Frost-Ckt1d Evaporator coil frost condition occurred on ckt #1 Automaticc
d
Frost-Ckt2 Evaporator coil frost condition occurred on ckt #2 Automaticc
Problem Comp #1 Alm Comp #1 off on low oil pressure (OP1) or motor protector (MP1) Automaticc
Comp #2 Alm Comp #2 off on low oil pressure (OP2) or motor protector (MP2) Automaticc
PumpDown-Ckt1 LP1 still closed 180 seconds into ckt #1 pumpdown operation Manual
PumpDown-Ckt2 LP2 still closed 180 seconds into ckt #2 pumpdown operation Manual
Ckt1 Clg Ena Clg enable input to CCB1 off when cooling was on Manual
Ckt2 Clg Ena Clg enable input to CCB2 off when cooling was on Manual
GenC Clg Ena Clg enable input to CCB1 off when cooling was on Manual
HtgB Htg Ena Htg enable input to EHB1 off when heating was on Manual
Ckt1 Comm Fail Comm failure occurred between MCB and CCB1 Automatic
Ckt2 Comm Fail Comm failure occurred between MCB and CCB2 Automatic
GenC Comm Fail Comm failure occurred between MCB and CCB1 Automatic
HtgB Comm Fail Comm failure occurred between MCB and EHB1 Automatic
ERecB Comm Fail Comm failure occurred between MCB and ERB1 Automatic
OA dampers not at 0% when unit off or not at 100% during mechanical cooling while
OA Dmpr Stuck Manual
OA Ambient= parameter indicates “Low”
Airflow Switch PC7 sensed airflow when unit was off Manual
Dirty Filter Pressure drop across first filter section exceeded the setting of PC5 Manual
Warning Dirty FnlFltr Pressure drop across final filter section exceeded the setting of PC6 Manual
Ckt1 H/W Clg enable input to CCB1 on when cooling off Manual
Ckt2 H/W Clg enable input to CCB2 on when cooling off Manual
GenC H/W Clg enable input to CCB1 on when cooling off Manual
HtgB H/W Htg enable input to EHB1 on when heating off Manual
a. The SAF and RAF smoke detectors must be manually reset after tripping. This can be accomplish be cycling control system power (S1 Switch).
b. A manual reset of the flame safeguard control FSG is required before the Heat Fail problem clears.
c. Manual clearing is required if this alarm occurs three times within a 24-hour period (2:00 a.m. of one day until 2:00 a.m. of the next). The oil pressure safety devices require a
manual reset on the device.
d. Not applicable on units equipped with hot gas bypass.
Remote Alarm Indication be set up to cause the output to either blink rapidly, blink
The MicroTech II control system includes a Remote Alarm slowly, turn off or remain on (no remote indication of the
Output (MCB-B04) to provide remote indication of alarm alarm). Refer to “Configuring Remote Alarm Output” on
conditions. Under normal (no active alarm) conditions, the page 54.
Remote Alarm Output (MCB-B04) is closed. The LED asso-
ciated with the alarm output indicates the state of the output: Note: If there are multiple active alarms, only the highest
On indicates MCB-B04 is closed, and off indicates MCB- priority alarm affects this output. This is always the
B04 is open. The Remote Alarm Output can be connected to alarm indicated by the Active Alarm 1 menu. Refer
some type of field-supplied annunciator. If an alarm occurs, to “Remote Alarm Output” in the “Field Wiring”
the Remote Alarm Output condition changes to either an section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit
“off” or “blinking” state. Each possible alarm condition can Controller.
52 OM 138
Figure 6: Active and Previous Alarm Menu Display
Menu Line Active Alarm 1 Previous Alarm 1

Alarm Name Item Line Dirty Filter Dirty Filter
Alarm Type Item Line Warning-Active Warning-Clear
Alarm Date/Time Item Line 12-Mar-00 04:50:49 12-Mar-00 05:15:34
Local Alarm Indication (Keypad/Display) 1. Pressing the Alarm key while the red LED on the key-
pad is on changes the display to the Active Alarm 1
Alarm information is provided via the unit keypad/display menu.
by four “active” and eight “previous” alarm menus.
Up to four active alarms are displayed in the Active Alarm 1,

Active Alarm 2, Active Alarm 3, and Active Alarm 4 menus.
The highest priority active alarm is displayed in the Active 2. Pressing the Right Arrow key changes the display to the
Alarm 1 menu, the second highest priority active alarm in Active Alarm 2 menu. Pressing the Right Arrow key
the Active Alarm 2, the third highest priority active alarm in again changes the display to the Active Alarm 3 menu.
the Active Alarm 3 and the forth highest priority active Pressing the Right Arrow key again changes the display
alarm in the Active Alarm 4 menu. If it happens that there to the Active Alarm 4 menu.
are more than four active alarms, the additional alarms do
not appear until one of these four active alarms are cleared.
When an active alarm is cleared the remaining active alarms

are resorted such that the highest priority active alarm 3. Pressing the Left Arrow key changes the display back to
remaining is displayed in Active Alarm 1, the second highest the Active Alarm 3 menu. Repeating this key two more
priority active alarm remaining is displayed in Active Alarm times changes the display back to the Active Alarm 1
2 and so forth. Figure 6 shows the typical display of an menu.
active alarm menu. The first line of the display is the menu Previous Alarm. When active alarms are cleared, they are
line, the second line indicates the alarm name, the third line stored in the previous alarm menus. The previous alarm
indicates the alarm “type” (fault, problem, or warning) and menus can be viewed as follows:
the forth line indicates the date and time the alarm occurred.
Whenever there is an active alarm, a red alarm LED on the
unit keypad turns on. If there are no active alarms, this LED
remains off.
1. Pressing the Back/Cancel key changes the display to
When an active alarm is cleared, it is stored in the Previous back to the main menu if not already there.
Alarm 1 menu. Any alarm that might be in the Previous
Alarm 1 menu is moved to the Previous Alarm 2 menu, any
alarm that might be in the Previous Alarm 2 menu is moved
to the Previous Alarm 3 menu and so forth. Any alarm that
might be in the Previous Alarm 8 menu is permanently 2. Assuming the blinking cursor is positioned on the Sys-
remove from the keypad. Figure 6 shows a typical display of tem Summary menu, pressing the Down Arrow (-) key
a previous alarm menu. The first line of the display is the six times changes the cursor position to the Previous
menu line, the second line indicates the alarm name, the third Alarms menu.
line indicates the alarm “type” (fault, problem, or warning)
and the forth line indicates the date and time the alarm
occurred.
Displaying Alarms 3. Pressing the Enter/Save key changes the display to the
Previous Alarm 1 menu.
Active Alarms. When an active alarm exists the red LED
on the keypad is on. The active alarm or alarms can be
viewed as follows:
4. Pressing the Right Arrow key changes the display to the
Previous Alarm 2 menu. Pressing the Right Arrow key
again changes the display to the Previous Alarm 3
OM 138 53
menu. Pressing the Right Arrow key five more times controller. This clears the active alarm and returns the
changes the display to the Previous Alarm 8 menu. unit to normal operation if no other alarms are active.
Remote Alarm Clearing
Although it is always recommended that active alarms be
cleared at the unit via the keypad/display, there are other
5. Pressing the Left Arrow key changes the display back to methods that effectively clear active alarms. Three such
the Active Alarm 7 menu. Repeating this six more times methods are described in the following sections.
changes the display back to the Previous Alarm 1 menu.
Unit System Switch (S1)
Clearing Alarms. Before any active alarm is cleared, the Cycling the main controller system switch (S1) located in the
alarm conditions that caused it must have returned to normal. unit main control panel has the effect of clearing the active
When the alarm conditions are no longer present, an active alarm menus. The disadvantage of clearing alarms in this
alarm may be cleared either automatically or manually. manor is that the active alarm data is not placed into the pre-
vious alarm buffer and alarm information is lost.
Note: Some of the safety devices that detect alarm condi-
tion require a manual reset at the device before the Note: Turning off the unit power disconnect switch has
alarm can be cleared. Refer to Table 20 on page 51 the same effect.
for listing of possible alarms and to determine
Manual Unit Enable/Disable Input
whether an alarm is manual or automatic reset.
Disabling the unit via the manual unit enable/disable input
An automatic reset active alarm immediately clears when the (this occurs when a field supplied and installed switch across
alarm conditions that caused it disappear. A manual reset terminals 101 and 104 on the unit field terminal block (TB2)
active alarm is cleared using the keypad/display as follows. is changed from the on (closed) to off (open) position. Refer
to the “Manual Unit Enable/Disable” section of IM 696,
1. The active alarm to be cleared is first displayed. Refer to
MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
“Displaying Alarms” on page 53.
Network Signal
The active alarms can be cleared via a network signal
through optional communication modules (including Ether-
net-BACnet, MSTP-BACnet and LonWorks).
2. Pressing the Clear Alarm key while the active alarm to
be cleared is in the display sends a clear command to the Configuring Remote Alarm Output
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Freeze= Fast Freeze Fault Remote Output Setup
Smoke= Fast Smoke Fault Remote Output Setup
Space Sensor= Fast Space Sensor Fault Remote Output Setup
Return Sensor= Fast Return Sensor Fault Remote Output Setup
Disch Sensor= Fast Disch Sensor Fault Remote Output Setup
Alarm Out Faults
Hi Return Tmp= Fast Hi Return Tmp Fault Remote Output Setup
Hi Disch Tmp= Fast Hi Disch Tmp Fault Remote Output Setup
Lo Disch Tmp= Fast Lo Disch Tmp Fault Remote Output Setup
Fan Fail= Fast Fan Fail Fault Remote Output Setup
OA Dmpr Stuck= Fast OA Dmpr Stuck Fault Remote Output Setup
54 OM 138
Table 21: Programmable Parameters (Continued)
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Freeze= Slow Freeze Problem Remote Output Setup
OAT Sensor= Slow OAT Sensor Problem Remote Output Setup
Space Sensor= Slow Space Sensor Problem Remote Output Setup
Return Sensor= Slow Return Sensor Problem Remote Output Setup
Ent Fan Sensor= Slow Ent Fan Sensor Problem Remote Output Setup
Lo Airflow= Slow Lo Airflow Problem Remote Output Setup
Heat Fail= Slow Heat Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
Hi Pres-Ckt1= Slow Hi Pres-Ckt1 Problem Remote Output Setup
Hi Pres-Ckt2= Slow Hi Pres-Ckt2 Problem Remote Output Setup
Lo Pres-Ckt1= Slow Lo Pres-Ckt1 Problem Remote Output Setup
Lo Pres-Ckt2= Slow Lo Pres-Ckt2 Problem Remote Output Setup
Frost-Ckt1= Slow Frost-Ckt1 Problem Remote Output Setup
Frost-Ckt2= Slow Frost-Ckt2 Problem Remote Output Setup
Comp #1 Alm= Slow Comp #1 Alm Problem Remote Output Setup
Alarm Out Problems
PumpDown-Ckt1= Slow PumpDown-Ckt1 Problem Remote Output Setup
PumpDown-Ckt2= Slow PumpDown-Ckt2 Problem Remote Output Setup
Ckt1 Clg Ena= Slow Ckt1 Clg Ena Problem Remote Output Setup
Ckt2 Clg Ena= Slow Ckt2 Clg Ena Problem Remote Output Setup
GenC Clg Ena= Slow GenC Clg Ena Problem Remote Output Setup
HtgB Htg Ena= Slow HtgB Htg Ena Problem Remote Output Setup
Ckt1 Comm Fail= Slow Ckt1 Comm Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
Ckt2 Comm Fail= Slow Ckt2 Comm Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
GenC Comm Fail= Slow GenC Comm Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
HtgB Comm Fail= Slow HtgB Comm Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
ERecB Comm Fail= Slow ERecB Comm Fail Problem Remote Output Setup
OA Dmpr Stuck= Off OA Dmpr Stuck Warning Remote Output Setup
Airflow Switch= Off Airflow Switch Warning Remote Output Setup
Dirty Filter= Off Dirty Filter Warning Remote Output Setup
Dirty FnlFltr= Off Dirty FnlFltr Warning Remote Output Setup
Alarm Out Warnings
Ckt1 H/W= Off Ckt1 H/W Warning Remote Output Setup
Ckt2 H/W= Off Ckt2 H/W Warning Remote Output Setup
GenC H/W= Off GenC H/W Warning Remote Output Setup
HtgB H/W= Off HtgB H/W Warning Remote Output Setup
Each possible alarm condition can be configured to cause the ter is set to “Off”, the Remote Alarm Output turns off when
Remote Alarm Output (MCB-B04) to blink rapidly, blink the alarm occurs. If an alarm output setup parameter is set to
slowly, turn off, or remain on (no remote indication of the “On”, the Remote Alarm Output remains on when the alarm
alarm). This allows the action of the Remote Alarm Output occurs.
to be “tailored” according to the specific requirements of the
application. When there are no active alarms within the con- For example, it may be necessary that only alarms that shut a
troller the Remote Alarm Output is “on” continuously. If an unit off completely (faults) be indicated remotely. In this
alarm output setup parameter is set to “Slow”, the Remote case all of the “fault” alarms are set to “Slow”, “Fast” or
Alarm Output cycles on and off at a slow rate when the “Off.” All others are set to “On.”
alarm occurs. If an alarm output setup parameter is set to
“Fast”, the Remote Alarm Output cycles on and off at a rapid Refer to “Remote Alarm Output” in the “Field Wiring” sec-
rate when the alarm occurs. If an alarm output setup parame- tion of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
OM 138 55
Setting Alarm Limits opposite or fully “closed” position for three minutes. After
three minutes, the controller records the analog input feed-
Table 22: Programmable Parameters back values from the actuators as equivalent to their fully
closed positions. The controller also records the analog input
Keypad/Display ID voltage signals from all connected pressure transducers as
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name equivalent to 0 “W.C.
Hi Disch Alm= 170 ºF

High Discharge Air Tem- Note: It is best to calibrate the unit with all the sensing
perature Alarm Limit tubing to the static pressure sensors disconnected.
Alarm Limits Lo Disch Alm= 40 ºF
Lo Discharge Air Temper- This assures that the sensors are truly seeing 0 “WC
ature Alarm Limit when calibrated.
High Return Air Tempera-
Hi Return Alm= 120 ºF After the Calibrate Mode procedure is complete, the Ctrl
ture Alarm Limit
Mode= parameter is set to “Off” which means the unit
Three of the alarm faults have adjustable limits that are used remains off until the Ctrl Mode= parameter is set to some-
to trigger the alarm. These are the Hi Disch Tmp, Lo Disch thing other than “Off” as described in “Auto/Manual Opera-
Tmp and Hi Return Tmp faults. Although the default settings tion” on page 45
should be suitable for most applications, the alarm limits can
Note: If the Calibrate Mode Flag is set to “Yes” while the
be set as necessary via the unit keypad/display. The default
Manual Control= parameter in the Manual Control
settings are shown in the table above.
menu is set to “Yes”, the Manual Control= parame-
ter reverts to “No.”
Unit Configuration/Service
Parameters Zone (Space) Temperature Sensor
Calibrate Mode Table 24: Programmable Parameters
Table 23: Programmable Parameters Keypad/Display ID

Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Space Sensor
Menu Name Item Name Unit Configuration Space Sensor= Yes
Present Flag
Unit Configuration Calibrate Mode= No Calibrate Mode Flag
An optional zone (space) temperature sensor can be installed

Calibrate Mode is a special service mode used to calibrate in the field and wired to the unit. When the optional sensor is
control actuator feedback signals and to zero static pressure installed, the Space Sensor Present Flag should be set to
sensor inputs. When the Calibrate Mode Flag is set to “Yes”, “Yes.” When the optional sensor is not installed, the Space
the position feedback potentiometers on the outdoor air Sensor Present Flag must be set to “No” to deactivate alarm
damper, return or exhaust fan inlet vane, modulating cooling functions associated with an open circuit at the space tem-
valve and modulating heating valve actuators are automati- perature analog input to the controller. The factory setting
cally calibrated. Any unit static pressure transducers are also for the Space Sensor Present Flag is “Yes.”
calibrated (or zeroed). The following is a description of the
Calibrate Mode procedure. The optional space temperature sensor is required to take
advantage of the MicroTech II unoccupied heating (night
When the Calibrate Mode Flag is set to “Yes”, the Occu-
setback) and cooling (night setup and purge) functions.
pancy= parameter is overridden and is set to “Unocc” and
These functions are disabled when the Space Sensor Present
accordingly the unit shuts off. When the unit is off the out-
Flag is set to “No.” Also, optimal start and the option of set-
door air dampers, return or exhaust vanes, modulating cool-
ting the CtrlTemp Src= parameter to “Space” are not avail-
ing valve, and modulating heating valve actuators are driven
able when the Space Sensor Present Flag is set to “No.”
to the 100% open position for three minutes. After three
minutes, the controller records the analog input feedback Refer to “Zone Temperature Sensor Packages” in the “Field
values from the actuators as equivalent to their fully open Wiring” section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit
positions. The controller then drives the actuators to the Controller.
56 OM 138
Miscellaneous Service Parameters design only for a building static pressure input.
There is no “first sensor” location.
The Second Pressure Sensor Present Flag should be set to
Keypad/Display ID “None” when the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag
Parameter Name is set to “None” or “Position”. When the Return/Exhaust Fan
Menu Name Item Name Capacity Control Flag is set to “Bldg”, the Second Pressure
Entering Fan Sensor Sensor Present Flag automatically reverts to “Bldg”. For
EFT Sensor= No
Present Flag detailed information regarding return fan capacity control,
Second Pressure refer to “Return Fan Capacity Control” on page 88.
2nd P Sensor= None
Sensor Present Flag RF/EF Ctrl
Return/Exhaust Fan The Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is used to
RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking Capacity Control
Unit Configuration
Flag
select the type of return or exhaust fan capacity control, if
any, to be used. When the unit is not equipped with return
Remote
Rem RF/EF Cap= fan vanes or a VFD, the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Con-
Return/Exhaust Fan
25% trol Flag should be set to “None”. When the unit is equipped
Capacity Set Point
with return fan vanes or a VFD, the Return/Exhaust Fan
Engineering Units
Eng Units= English
Control Flag
Capacity Control Flag can either be set to “Bldg” or “Posi-
tion”.When the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is
set to “Bldg”, the return or exhaust fan capacity is controlled
The Unit Configuration menu contains several miscella-
to maintain the building static pressure at a building static
neous control parameters as listed in the table above. These
pressure set point. When the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity
parameters are generally the type that are set at the factory
Control Flag is set to “Position”, then the return or exhaust
and might be adjusted when the equipment is started up and
fan capacity is controlled to the Remote Return/Exhaust Fan
generally do not required further adjustment. The following
Capacity Set Point. For detailed information regarding return
sections describe these parameters.
or exhaust fan capacity control, refer to“Return Fan Capacity
EFT Sensor Control” on page 88 or “Energy Recovery” on page 86.
When a unit is equipped with gas or electric heat, it is Rem RF/EF Cap
equipped with an entering fan temperature (EFT) sensor.
The the return or exhaust fan capacity is controlled to main-
This sensor senses the temperature of the air entering the dis-
tain the Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set Point
charge air fan and is compared to the unit discharge air tem-
when the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is set to
perature to obtain an indication of the temperature rise across
“Position”. The Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set
the gas or electric heat section. The controller uses this infor-
Point is normally adjusted via a network signal but can also
mation to assure the heat rise across the heater does not
be adjusted via the keypad/display in the absence of a net-
exceed the safe limit for the heat exchanger. When the enter-
work connection to the parameter. For detailed information
ing fan temperature sensor is installed the Entering Fan Sen-
regarding return or exhaust fan capacity control, refer
sor Present Flag is set to “Yes.” When the entering fan
to“Return Fan Capacity Control” on page 88 or “Energy
temperature sensor is not installed the Entering Fan Sensor
Recovery” on page 86.
Present Flag is set to “No.” Setting this parameter to “No”
disables the alarm function associated with an open circuit at Eng Units
the EFT temperature sensor input. The Engineering Units Control Flag is used to select the sys-
2nd P Sensor tem of engineering units used for displaying data on the key-
pad. If this parameter is set to “English”, the keypad data is
The Second Pressure Sensor Present Flag is used to indicate
displayed in inch-pound (I-P) units. If this parameter is set to
whether or not an optional building static pressure sensor is
“SI Canada”, the keypad data is displayed in the Interna-
installed in the “second sensor” input location.
tional System of Units (SI) used in Canada. If this parameter
Note: When the unit is equipped for zone (or space com- is set to “SI Europe”, the keypad data is displayed in the
fort) control, the “second sensor” input location is International System of Units (SI) used in Europe.
OM 138 57
Control Timer Settings air temperature conditions to equalize before temperature
control begins. Once in the Recirc operating state, the unit
Table 26: Programmable Parameters remains there until the Recirculate State Timer expires.
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Low DAT
Menu Name Item Name
Service= 0 min Fast Service Timer
The Low Discharge Temperature Ignore Timer sets the dura-
Recirculate State
tion of a time period after unit start up during which the Lo
Recirculate= 3 min Disch Tmp fault is ignored. This may be particularly impor-
Timer
Low Discharge Tem- tant in colder climates when a unit has been off for a signifi-
Low DAT= 3 min
perature Ignore Timer cant time period during which the unit, including the
Max MWU= 90 min
Maximum Morning discharge air temperature sensor, has become very cold. This
Warm-up Timer time period allows the unit to run long enough to warm the
Timer Settings Bypass Time Incre-
Bypass= 120 min discharge sensor above the alarm limit, preventing nuisance
ment
unit alarm shutdown. For detailed information regarding the
Startup Initialization
Start Init= 120 min
Timer
Lo Disch Tmp fault refer to “Alarm Control” on page 91.
Minimum Exhaust
Min Exh On= 120 sec
Fan On Timer
Max MWU
Minimum Exhaust
Min Exh Off= 120 sec The Maximum Morning Warm-up Timer sets a maximum
Fan Off Timer
duration for the MWU operating state applicable on units
with return air (100% OA units have no MWU operating
Several MicroTech II internal control timers can be adjusted state). Whenever a unit with return air leaves the Recirc
via the keypad/display Timer Settings menu. The following operating state, it enters the MWU operating state if the Ctrl
sections describe these timers. Temp= parameter value is cold. The unit remains in the
MWU operating state until either the Ctrl Temp= parameter
Service value warms up or until the Maximum Morning Warm-up
Many of the internal control timers can be temporarily sped Timer expires. For detailed information regarding MWU
up by using the Fast Service Timer. When set to a time value, operation, refer to “Heating: Multistage” on page 78, or
the Fast Service Timer begins counting down. While this “Heating: Modulating” on page 80, as applicable.
parameter is counting down the following normal unit timers
Bypass
are set to 20 seconds:
l Startup Initialization Timer The Bypass Time Increment sets the time period for which
the unit operates each time the tenant override button on the
l Post Heat Timer optional space temperature sensor is pressed or the Occ
l Cooling Interstage Timer Mode= parameter is set to “Bypass.” The Bypass Time=
parameter in the Occupancy menu is set or reset to this value
l Heating Interstage Timer when the tenant override button is pressed or the Occ Mode=
These timers return to their normal settings if the Fast Ser- parameter is set to “Bypass.” The unit then operates until the
vice Timer is manually set to 0 or when it counts down to 0. Bypass Timer= parameter counts down to 0. For detailed
information regarding bypass operation, refer to “Bypass
Caution: This fast timers feature is meant to be used only Time (Tenant Override)” on page 48.
by a knowledgeable service technician to facili-
tate testing the unit. Start Init
The Startup Initialization Timer defines the duration of the

Recirculate
Startup operating state. When a unit is started or restarted, it
The Recirculate State Timer defines the duration of the always transitions through a “start sequence” that begins
Recirc operating state applicable on units with return air with the Startup operating state. During the Startup operating
(100% OA units have no Recirc operating state). Whenever state, the unit fans remain off and heating and cooling are
a unit with return air is started or restarted, it always transi- disabled. On units equipped with return air, the outdoor air
tions through a “start sequence” which includes the Startup, damper actuator is driven closed. On units equipped with
followed by the Recirc operating state. During the Recirc 100% outdoor air hoods, the outdoor air dampers are driven
operating state, the unit fans run while the outdoor air damp- fully open. Return fan inlet vane actuators (if present) are
ers remain closed. Heating and cooling operation are dis- driven to a 17% minimum startup position. Refer to “Operat-
abled during the Recirc operating state to allow the “system” ing States and Sequences” on page 61.
58 OM 138
Manual Output Control Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to
“Off” the discharge air fan is turned off.
RF/EF Fan
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name The Manual Return/Exhaust Fan Control Flag is used to
Menu Name Item Name manually turn the return or exhaust fan on and off. When the
Manual Control = No
Manual Control Mode Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter
Flag is set to “On” the return or exhaust fan is turned on. When
Manual Discharge the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this
Discharge Fan = Off
Fan Control Flag
parameter is set to “Off” the return or exhaust fan is turned
Manual off.
RF/EF Fan = Off Return/Exhaust Fan
Control Flag Fan Operation
Manual Fan Operation The Manual Fan Operation Output Control Flag is used to
Fan Operation = Off
Output Control Flag
manually turn the Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) on and
Manual Remote Alarm
Alarm = Normal off. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and
Output Control Flag
this parameter is set to “On” the Fan Operation Output is
Manual OA Damper
Manual Control OA Damper = Auto
Control Flag
turned on. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to
Manual Modulating
“Yes” and this parameter is set to “Off” the Fan Operation
Mod Cooling = Auto Cooling Valve Control Output is turned off. For detailed information regarding the
Flag Fan Operation Output, refer to “Fan Operation Output” in
Manual Modulating the “Field Wiring” section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied
Mod Heating = Auto Heating Valve Control Rooftop Unit Controller.
Flag
Alarm
Manual
RF/EF Vanes = Auto Return/Exhaust Vane The Manual Remote Alarm Output Control Flag is used to
Actuator Control Flag manually turn the Remote Alarm Output (MCB-BO4) on
Manual and off. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes”
RF/EF VFD = Auto Return/Exhaust VFD and this parameter is set to “Normal” the Remote Alarm
Control Flag
Output is turned on. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is
The Manual Control menu is a special service menu that can set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Alarm” the Remote
be used to control many of the outputs on the main control Alarm Output is turned off. For detailed information regard-
board (MCB) in a manual mode. This can be used to test the ing the Remote Alarm Output, refer to “Remote Alarm Out-
operation of the various devices controlled by the outputs. put” in the “Field Wiring” section of IM 696, MicroTech
This is very useful in determining whether a problem is the Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
result of a wiring problem or defective device rather than a OA Damper
problem within the main controller. The Manual OA Damper Control Flag is used to manually
Manual Control drive the outdoor air dampers open and closed. When the
Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter
The Manual Control Mode Flag is used to turn the manual is set to “Open” the open outdoor damper output (MCB-
control mode of operation on and off. When this parameter is BO6) is turned on and the outdoor air dampers stroke open
set to “No” the unit operates normally. When this parameter continuously. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to
is set to “Yes” normal operation of the control outputs is “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Close” the close outdoor
overridden and the condition of each output is defined by damper output (MCB-BO5) is turned on and the outdoor air
setting the remaining items within the Manual Control menu. dampers stroke closed continuously. When the Manual Con-
All alarms are inactive when the Manual Control Mode Flag trol Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to
is set to “Yes”. “Auto” the open and close outdoor damper outputs remain
off and the outdoor air dampers remain at their current posi-
Note: If the Calibrate Mode= parameter in the Unit Con-
tion.
figuration menu is set to “Yes” while the Manual
Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes”, the Manual Con- Mod Cooling
trol Mode Flag reverts to “No.” The Manual Modulating Cooling Valve Control Flag is used
to manually drive the modulating cooling valve open and
Discharge Fan
closed. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes”
The Manual Discharge Fan Control Flag is used to manually and this parameter is set to “Open” the open cooling valve
turn the discharge air fan on and off. When the Manual Con- output (MCB-BO8) is turned on and the cooling valve
trol Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to strokes open continuously. When the Manual Control Mode
“On” the discharge air fan is turned on. When the Manual Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Close” the
OM 138 59
close cooling valve output (MCB-BO7) is turned on and the open return or exhaust inlet vanes output (MCB-BO16) is
cooling valve strokes closed continuously. When the Manual turned on and the vanes stroke open continuously. When the
Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter
“Auto” the open and close cooling valve outputs remain off is set to “Close” the close return or exhaust inlet vanes out-
and the cooling valve remains at its current position. put (MCB-BO15) is turned on and the vanes are stroked
Mod Heating closed continuously. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is
set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Auto” the open and
The Manual Modulating Heating Valve Control Flag is used close return or exhaust inlet vanes outputs remain off and the
to manually drive the modulating heating valve open and vanes remain at their current position.
closed. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes”
and this parameter is set to “Open” the open heating valve RF/EF VFD
output (MCB-BO10) is turned on and the heating valve
The Manual Return/Exhaust VFD Control Flag is used to
strokes open continuously. When the Manual Control Mode
manually increase and decrease the return air or exhaust fan
Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Close” the
VFD speed. When the Manual Control Mode Flag is set to
close heating valve output (MCB-BO9) is turned on and the
“Yes” and this parameter is set to “Faster” the increase return
heating valve strokes closed continuously. When the Manual
or exhaust fan VFD speed output (MCB-BO-16) is turned on
Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to
and the VFD speed increases continuously. When the Man-
“Auto” the open and close heating valve outputs remain off
ual Control Mode Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is
and the heating valve remains at its current position.
set to “Slower” the decrease return or exhaust fan VFD
RF/EF Vanes speed output (MCB-BO15) is turned on and the VFD speed
The Manual Return/Exhaust Vane Actuator Control Flag is decreases continuously. When the Manual Control Mode
used to manually drive the return air or exhaust fan inlet Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Auto” the
vanes open and closed. When the Manual Control Mode increase and decrease return or exhaust fan VFD speed out-
Flag is set to “Yes” and this parameter is set to “Open” the puts remain off and the VFD remains at its current position.
60 OM 138
Description of Operation
The following sections describe how the various zone (or Table 28 shows the all the normal operating states and the
space comfort) control unit processes function to maintain status information they summarize
temperature, ventilation and pressure control. The “Operat-
ing States and Sequences” section provides an overall Operating State Descriptions
description of unit operation. The subsequent sections pro- The following sections describe each of the unit operating
vide detailed descriptions of the various control processes states.
and how the related set points and parameters affect them. Off
The related set points and parameters are listed at the begin-
There are five different Off operating states. In any of the
ning of each applicable sub-section. The default keypad pro-
Off operating states the unit is shut down. The fans are off
grammable values are shown in italic letters.
and the outdoor air dampers are closed, any fan inlet vanes
Note: Not all the features covered in this section apply to or VFD is driven to 0%. Cooling and heating are disabled.
all units depending on the specific unit options. The The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is open.
applicable items should be read and understood The five different Off operating states are described in the
before making set point or control parameter following sections:
changes.
Off Unoc . Generally, the unit operating state is Off Unoc
when it the unit is being scheduled on and off by a time clock
Operating States and Sequences function and the time schedule indicates an unoccupied
period. Specifically, the operating state is Off Unoc when the
About Operating States Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” and none of the
Operating states define the current overall status of the roof- unoccupied unit operation functions are active. For details
top unit. The operating state can be displayed and the unit regarding the Occupancy= parameter refer to “Occupancy”
operating condition can be quickly determined by viewing on page 46. For details regarding unoccupied unit operation
the UnitStatus= parameter in the System menu. Each operat- functions refer to “Unoccupied Control” on page 89.
ing state summarizes the following information: Off Net . The unit operating state is Off Net when the Appl
l Discharge and return/exhaust fan status Mode= parameter is set to “Off” via a network signal and the
Ctrl Mode= parameter is set to “Auto.” For detailed infor-
l Outdoor air damper status
mation regarding the Appl Mode= and Ctrl Mode= parame-
l Return/exhaust airflow capacity ter, refer to “Auto/Manual Operation” on page 45.
l Heating system status The unit operating state is also Off Net when the Emerg
l Cooling system status Override= parameter in the Occupancy menu is set to “Off.”
l Fan Operation Output status (MCB-BO3) Refer to “Emergency Override” on page 48.
Table 28: Operating States

Return Exhaust Mechanical
Operating Discharge/ Exhaust OA Heat Fan Output
Airflow Airflow Cooling
State Return Fans Fan Dampers Enabled (MCB-BO3)
Capacity Capacity Enabled
Off Off Off Closed 0% 0% No No Open
Startup Off Off Closed 0% 0% No No Closed
Recirc On Off Closed Modulating 0% No No Closed
Fan Only On Cycling Minimum Modulating Modulating No No Closed
Econo On Cycling Modulating Modulating Modulating No No Closed
Minimum or
Cooling On Cycling Modulating Modulating No Yes Closed
Opena
MWU On Off Closed Modulating 0% Yes No Closed
Heating On Cycling Minimum Modulating Modulating Yes No Closed
Min DAT On Cycling Minimum Modulating Modulating Yes No Closed
UnocEcon On Cycling Modulating Modulating Modulating No No Closed
Closed or
UnocClg On Cycling Modulating Modulating No Yes Closed
Openb
UnocHtg On Off Closed Modulating 0% Yes No Closed
a. When the OA Ambient= parameter indicates “Low”, the economizer outdoor air dampers is fully open; when the OA Ambient= parameter
indicates “High”, the economizer outdoor air dampers are at Eff Min OA Pos= value.
b. When the OA Ambient= parameter indicates “Low”, the outdoor air dampers are fully open; when the OA Ambient= parameter indicates
“High”, the outdoor air dampers are fully closed.
OM 138 61
Off Sw. The unit operating state is Off Sw when a field sup- Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed and in building
plied and installed switch across terminals 101 and 104 on pressure control applications, normal return fan capacity
the unit field terminal block (TB2) is in the on or closed control is maintained.
position (binary input MCB-BI2 on). Refer to “Manual Unit
Econo
Enable/Disable” in IM 696, MicroTech Applied Rooftop Unit
Controller. The unit enters the Econo operating state when cooling is
required during occupied operation when economizer opera-
Off Alm. The unit operating state is Off Alm when an active tion is enabled. During the Econo operating state, mechani-
alarm of the “fault” type has a unit shut down. Refer to cal cooling and heating are disabled. The outdoor and return
“Alarm Monitoring” on page 51 for a description of “fault” air dampers are modulated to maintain the discharge air tem-
alarms. perature at the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in the Discharge
Off Man. The unit operating state is Off Man when the Ctrl Cooling menu. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is
Mode= parameter is set to “Off.” For detailed information closed and in building pressure control applications, normal
regarding the Ctrl Mode= parameter, refer to “Ctrl Mode” on return fan capacity control is maintained. Mechanical cool-
page 45. ing and heating are disabled.
Startup Note: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the
When a unit is commanded to start the unit always enters the Econo operating state.
Startup operating state from the Off operating state. The unit
For detailed information regarding economizer operation,
remains in the Startup operating state for an adjustable time
refer to “Economizer” on page 68.
period defined by the Start Init= parameter in the Timer Set-
tings menu (default value is 180 seconds) before entering the Cooling
Recirc operating state. During the Startup operating state the The unit enters the Cooling operating state during occupied
unit is prepared for startup. The fans remain off, the outdoor operation when cooling is required and the economizer is
air dampers are driven closed, any fan inlet vanes are driven either disabled, not present, or already fully opened. During
to a fixed 17% minimum position (VFD remains at 0% the Cooling operating state, the outdoor air dampers are fully
speed). Cooling and heating remain disabled. The Fan Oper- open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air unit or if economizer
ation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed. operation is enabled. The outdoor air dampers are controlled
For more information regarding the Startup operating state, to the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter if economizer operation is
refer to “Startup Control” on page 64. disabled or not present. Mechanical cooling is supplied as
Recirc required to maintain the Ctrl Temp= parameter at the Eff Clg
Spt= in the Zone Cooling menu. The Fan Operation Output
Units with return air always enter the Recirc operating state
(MCB-BO3) is closed and in building pressure control appli-
after the completion of the Startup operating state. In the
cations, normal return fan capacity control is maintained.
Recirc operating state fans are started and operate while the
Heating is disabled.
outdoor air dampers remain closed. This allows temperature
conditions throughout the unit and space to equalize before For detailed information regarding the cooling operation,
temperature control begins. Cooling and heating remain dis- refer to “Cooling: Multistage” on page 72 or “Cooling: Mod-
abled. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed and ulating” on page 77 as applicable.
in building pressure control applications, normal return fan MWU
capacity control is maintained. The unit remains in the
Recirc operating state until the Recirculate State Timer When the unit transitions from unoccupied to occupied oper-
expires. This timer is adjustable from 2 to 60 minutes with ation and heating is required to warm the Ctrl Temp= param-
the Recirculate= parameter in the Timer Settings menu. eter up to the Eff Htg Spt= setting in the Zone Heating menu,
the unit enters the MWU (Morning Warm-up) operating state
Note: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the after the Startup and Recirc operating states are complete.
Recirc operating state. The MWU operating state is similar to the Heating operating
For more information regarding the Recirc operating state, state except that the outdoor air dampers are held closed
refer to “Startup Control” on page 64. rather than controlled to the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter.
Once entering the MWU operating state, the unit remains
Fan Only there until either the Ctrl Temp= parameter warms up to the
The unit enters the Fan Only operating state during occupied Eff Htg Spt= setting in the Zone Heating menu or until a
operation when cooling and heating are either not required maximum morning warm-up time period expires. This time
based unit heat/cool changeover function or are disabled. period is defined by the Max MWU= parameter in the Timer
During the Fan Only operating state, the outdoor air dampers Settings menu. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is
are either 100% open on a 100% outdoor air unit or are con- closed and in building pressure control applications, normal
trolled to the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter in the OA Damper return fan capacity control is maintained. Cooling is dis-
menu. Cooling and heating operation is disabled. The Fan abled.
62 OM 138
Note: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the UnocClg
MWU operating state.
The unit enters the UnocClg operating state when unoccu-
For detailed information regarding morning warm-up heat- pied cooling (night setup) operation is required and the econ-
ing operation, refer to “Heating: Multistage” on page 78, or omizer is either disabled, not present, or already fully
“Heating: Modulating” on page 80 as applicable. opened. During the UnocClg operating state, the outdoor air
dampers are fully open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air unit
Heating or if economizer operation is enabled. The outdoor air damp-
The unit enters the Heating operating state when heating is ers are at 0% if economizer operation is disabled or not
required during occupied operation. During the Heating present. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed
operating state, the outdoor air dampers are either 100% and in building pressure control applications, normal return
open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air unit or controlled to the fan capacity control is maintained. Heating is disabled.
Eff Min OA Pos= parameter. Cooling is disabled. The Fan
For detailed information regarding the unoccupied cooling
Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed and in building
operation, refer to “Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup)” on
pressure control applications, normal return fan capacity
page 90.
control is maintained.
For detailed information regarding heating operation, refer UnocHtg
to “Heating: Multistage” on page 78, or “Heating: Modulat- The unit enters the UnocHtg operating state when unoccu-
ing” on page 80 as applicable. pied heating (night setback) operation is required. During the
Min DAT UnocHtg operating state, the outdoor air dampers are closed.
The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed and in
The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied building pressure control applications, normal return fan
operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based capacity control is maintained. Cooling is disabled.
on the Eff Clg Spt= and Eff Htg Spt= parameters in the Zone
Cooling and Zone Heating menus, but the discharge air tem- For detailed information regarding the unoccupied heating
perature falls below the MinDAT Limit= parameter in the operation, refer to “Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)” on
Discharge Heating menu. The Min DAT operating state pre- page 89.
vents cold discharge air temperatures during what would
UnocFanO
normally be the Fan Only operating state. During the Min
DAT operating state, the outdoor air dampers are either The UnocFanO operating state is not a “typical” operating
100% open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air unit or are con- state. If night set back operation is activated while the unit
trolled to the Eff Min OA Pos= parameter. Cooling is dis- heating is disabled or if the unit is not equipped with heating
abled. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) is closed and equipment, the unit with enter the UnocFanO operating state
in building pressure control applications, normal return fan in lieu of the UnocHtg operating state. Unit operation is the
capacity control is maintained. same as describe for the Fan Only operating state except that
the outdoor air dampers are controlled as in the UnocHtg
For detailed information regarding the Min DAT operating
operating state.
state, refer to “Discharge Air Low Limit Control” on page 80
(multistage heat) or “Discharge Air Low Limit Control” on The unit will also enter the UnocFanO operating state if
page 84 (modulating heat) as applicable. cooling or heating are disable while in the UnocEcon, Unoc-
Clg or UnocHtg operating states. If entering the UnocFanO
UnocEcon
operating state from the UnocEcon or UnocClg operating
The unit enters the UnocEcon operating state if the outdoor state, the outdoor dampers are control as describe for the
air is suitable for free cooling when “purge” or unoccupied UnocClg operating state.
cooling (night setup) operation is required. During the Uno-
cEcon operating state, the outdoor air dampers are modu- For detailed information regarding the unoccupied heating or
lated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Eff Clg cooling operation, refer to “Unoccupied Control” on
Spt= parameter in the Discharge Cooling menu. Mechanical page 89.
cooling is disabled. The Fan Operation Output (MCB-BO3) Man Ctrl
is closed and in building pressure control applications, nor-
mal return fan capacity control is maintained. Heating is dis- The unit enters the Man Ctrl operating state when the Man-
abled. ual Control= parameter in the Manual Control menu is set to
“Yes”. During manual operation, all the unit control func-
Note: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the tions are disabled and the main control board (MCB) outputs
UnocEcon operating state can be turned on and off manually by setting the parameters
contained in the Manual Control menu.
For detailed information regarding unoccupied economizer
operation, refer to “Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup)” on For detailed information regarding manual unit control, refer
page 90 and “Purge” on page 90. to “Manual Output Control” on page 59
OM 138 63
Figure 7: Operating State Sequence Chart
Operating State Sequence Chart During the Startup operating state, the Fan Operation Output
(MCB-BO3) is closed to indicate that the fans are about to
Operating states and the transitions between them help to
start. On units with return fan inlet vanes, the vanes are
describe the unit sequences of operation. Figure 7 shows all
driven open to the non-adjustable Minimum Inlet Vane Posi-
of the operating state transitions that can occur as a result of
tion Limit. This limit is 17% and is not adjustable. The Min-
normal control. Depending on the unit options, some operat-
imum Inlet Vane Position Limit assures that the return fan
ing states may not apply.
does not start with a completely blocked airflow path. On
units with a return fan VFD, the VFD remains at 0% speed.
Startup Control The unit remains in the Startup operating state until the Star-
tup Initialization Timer expires.
A rooftop unit can startup and run for a variety of reasons.
Examples are the internal time schedule function, an external Note: On 100% OA units equipped with gas heat, the
time clock signal, a tenant override signal or the unoccupied Startup period may last longer than the period
heating (night setback) and cooling (night setup and purge) defined by the Startup Initialization Timer if heat is
functions. Regardless of the reason it is started, the unit required at unit startup. For a description of this
always transitions through a “controlled” startup sequence special 100% OA gas heat startup sequence, refer to
before allowing temperature control to begin. Figure on page 82.
Before Startup Caution: The Startup Initialization Timer should be set so

that the Startup operating state lasts long enough
Table 29: Programmable Parameters to allow any field-supplied equipment (such as
isolation damper sets) controlled by the Fan
Keypad/Display ID Operation Output (MCB-BO3) to prepare for fan
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name operation.
Minimum Inlet Vane Position

- -
Limit
Timer Settings Start Init = 3 min Startup Initialization Timer
When the controller receives a startup command, its operat-

ing state changes from the Off to Startup operating state.
64 OM 138
Fan Startup As soon as the unit leaves the Startup operating state, the dis-
charge fan starts and the Airflow Check Timer is reset and
Table 30: Programmable Parameters starts timing down. This timer value is a fixed two minutes.
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
The Fan Fail fault which indicates loss of airflow is pre-
Menu Name Item Name vented from occurring after leaving the Startup operating
- - Fan Delay Timer state until the Airflow Check Timer expires.
- - Airflow Check Timer After the unit leaves the Startup operating state, the operat-
Timer Settings Recirculate= 3 min Recirculate State Timer ing state entered is a function of the current occupied/unoc-
cupied as well as the current temperature conditions. The
Return Air Units following section describes the heating/cooling changeover
function, which dictates whether the unit enters a heating,
The unit enters the Recirc operating state after leaving the cooling or fan only operating state.
Startup operating state. During the Recirc operating state, the
fans are stated and operated with the outdoor air dampers Note: While the Airflow Check Timer is timing down
closed to allow temperature conditions throughout the unit and, therefore, while the Fan Fail fault alarm is
and space to equalize before temperature control begins. being ignored, the unit will not be allowed to enter
Cooling and heating remain disabled. a cooling operating state.
As soon as the unit leaves the Startup operating state, the dis-
charge fan starts and the following three timers are reset and Heat/Cool Changeover
start timing down: (1) the Fan Delay Timer, (2) the Airflow
In general, a unit configured for zone (or space comfort)
Check Timer, and (3) the Recirculate State Timer.
control either operates to maintain the Effective Cooling
When the Fan Delay Timer expires, the return fan is started Enable Set Point using economizer and/or mechanical cool-
(if present). The Fan Delay Timer value is a fixed four sec- ing or the Effective Heating Enable Set Point using the heat-
onds. Once both fans start, the return fan capacity (if vari- ing equipment.
able) is modulated to maintain the building static pressure or
The Effective Cooling Enable Set Point and Effective Heat-
position set point as applicable. For detailed information
ing Enable Set Point are not adjustable from the keypad.
regarding return fan capacity control, refer to “Return Fan
They are set equal to the Cooling Enable Set Point and Heat-
Capacity Control” on page 88.
ing Enable Set Point respectively or based on a signal from
The Fan Fail fault which indicates loss of airflow is pre- an optional space temperature sensor with set point adjust-
vented from occurring after leaving the Startup operating ment capability. For details regarding the use of thermostat
state until the Airflow Check Timer expires. The Airflow supplied set points, refer to “Tstat Source Set Points” on
Check Timer value is a fixed two minutes. page 66.
Once in the Recirc operating state, the unit remains there Note: Except when the dehumidification function is
until the Recirculate State Timer and Airflow Check Timer- active, cooling and heating do not operate simulta-
expire. After the unit leaves the Recirc operating state, the neously. The controller prevents the set points and
operating state entered is a function of the current occu- dead bands from being set so that the Cooling
pied/unoccupied as well as the current temperature condi- Enable Dead Band and Heating Enable Dead Band
tions. The Heat/Cool Changeover section describes the overlap. In doing this, the controller always gives
heating/cooling changeover function, which dictates whether the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point the highest
the unit enters a heating, cooling or the Fan Only operating priority. Regardless of whether the cooling set point
state. is lowered, the heating set point is raised or either
100% Outdoor Air Units of the dead bands are raised, the controller automat-
ically lowers the Effective Heating Set Point
If the unit is equipped with a 100% outdoor air hood, the enough to prevent the dead bands from overlapping.
Recirc operating state is bypassed and the fans are started as
the unit directly enters either a heating or the Fan Only oper- The following sections describe the unit heat/cool
ating state after leaving the Startup operating state. changeover function.
OM 138 65
Temperature Control Once enabled by the “Control Temperature” cooling or heat-
ing capacity control operates as described in “Economizer”
Table 31: Programmable Parameters on page 68, “Cooling: Multistage” on page 72, “Cooling:
Modulating” on page 77, “Heating: Multistage” on page 78,
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name or “Heating: Modulating” on page 80 as applicable. The fol-
Menu Name Item Name lowing sections describe in detail how the “Control Temper-
Control Temperature ature” enables cooling and heating operation.
CntlTemp Src= Return
Source
Effective Cooling Note: Although enabled based on the “Control Tempera-
Eff Clg Spt= ____ °F
Enable Set Point ture”, cooling or heating operation can be disabled
Zone Cooling
Cooling Enable Set for other reasons. Refer to “Clg Status” on
Occ Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Point page 43and “Htg Status” on page 44.
Cooling Enable Dead
Clg Deadband= 1.0 ºF
Band Set Points and Dead Bands
Control Temperature
CntlTemp Src= Return
Source In determining whether heating or cooling operation is
enabled, the controller compares the “Control Temperature”
Effective Heating
Eff Htg Spt= ____ °F input with the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point and the
Enable Set Point
Zone Heating Effective Heating Enable Set Point.
Heating Enable Set
Occ Htg Spt= 70.0 ºF
Point
Keypad/Network Source Set Points. When the Zone
Heating Enable Dead
Htg Deadband= 1.0 ºF
Band Set Point Source Flag is set to “Keypad”, the Effective Cool-
ing Enable Set Point and the Effective Heating Enable Set
Zone Temp Zone Set Point Source
Spt Source= Keypad Point are set to the Cooling Enable Set Point and the Heating
Setup Flag
Enable Set Point. The Cooling Enable Set Point and the
Heating Enable Set Point can then be set as required via a
Control Temperature network signal.
The “Control Temperature” is defined as the unit tempera-
Tstat Source Set Points. When the Zone Set Point
ture input used to make the heat/cool changeover decision
Source Flag is set to “Tstat”, the Effective Cooling Enable
which determines whether the unit is controlling to the
Set Point and the Effective Heating Enable Set Point are set
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point or the Effective Heating
Enable Set Point. Also, when cooling is active, the “Control based on an analog signal from an optional space tempera-
Temperature” is maintained at the Effective Cooling Enable ture sensor with set point adjustment capability.
Set Point and when heating is active the “Control Tempera- To set the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point and the Effec-
ture” is maintained at the Effective Heating Enable Set Point. tive Heating Enable Set Points based on the remote set point
Either the return air or space temperature sensor can be input, the controller first determines the difference between
selected as the “Control Temperature.” the Cooling Enable Set Point to the Heating Enable Set
When the Control Temperature Source is set to “Return”, the Point. The controller then sets the Effective Cooling Enable
unit return air temperature sensor acts as the “Control Tem- Set Point to the current setting on the space sensor plus half
perature.” this difference. The controller then sets the Effective Heating
Enable Set Point to the current setting on the space sensor
When the Control Temperature Source is set to “Space”, the minus half this difference.
unit space air temperature sensor acts as the “Control Tem-
perature.” For example, if the Cooling Enable Set Point is set to 75°F,
the Heating Enable Set Point is set to 70°F and the set point
Note: The Control Temperature Source can not be set to adjustment on the space temperature sensor is set to70°F, the
“Return” on a 100% OA unit and it can only be set Effective Cooling Set Point would be set to 72.5°F and the
to “Space” when the unit is equipped with an Heating Enable Set Point would be set to 67.5°F.
optional space sensor. This means that an optional
space sensor is required on a 100% OA unit. Cooling. When the “Control Temperature” rises above the
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the
The current value of the “Control Temperature” can be dis- Cooling Enable Dead Band, cooling operation is enabled and
played be viewing the Ctrl Temp= parameter in the Temper- the controller starts to increase the cooling capacity. This is
atures menu. shown as Point A in Figure 8.
66 OM 138
Figure 8: Illustrative Heat/Cool Changeover Operating Sequence
Cooling Enabled
Effective Cooling
A Enable Set Point
} Cooling Enable Dead Band

Control Temperature
D
}
}
Fan Only
Heating Enable Dead Band
C
Effective Heating
Enable Set Point
Heating Enabled
Time
Cooling to Fan Only. When cooling is active and the ture low limit function if the discharge air temperature gets
“Control Temperature” then drops below the Effective Cool- too cold. Refer to “Discharge Air Low Limit Control” on
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable page 80 (multistage heat) or “Discharge Air Low Limit Con-
Dead Band, the controller starts to decrease the cooling trol” on page 84 (modulating heat) as applicable.
capacity. As soon as the cooling is staged or modulate off
completely the unit enters and runs in the Fan Only operating Heating. When the “Control Temperature” drops below the
state. This shown as Point B in Figure 8.1 Effective Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the
Heating Enable Dead Band, heating operation is enabled and
While in the Fan Only operating state and if the unit is the controller starts to increase the heating capacity. This is
equipped with modulating or multistage heat, the unit can shown as Point C in Figure 8.
operate the heat in this case based on a discharge tempera-
Heating to Fan Only. When heating is active and the
1. While in the Fan Only operating state and if the unit is “Control Temperature” then rises above the Effective Heat-
equipped with modulating or multistage heat, the unit can ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable
operate the heat in this case based on a discharge tempera-
ture low limit function if the discharge air temperature gets
Dead Band, the controller starts to decrease the heating
too cold. Refer to “Discharge Air Low Limit Control” on capacity. As soon as the heating is staged or modulate off
page 80 (multistage heat) or “Discharge Air Low Limit Con- completely the unit enters and runs in the Fan Only operating
trol” on page 84 (modulating heat) as applicable. state. This shown as Point D in Figure 8.1
OM 138 67
0-30% Outdoor Air Damper Control Economizer
Minimum Ventilation Control Temperature Control
Table 32: Programmable Parameters Table 33: Programmable Parameters
Keypad/Display ID Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name Menu Name Item Name
Minimum Outdoor Effective Cooling

MinOA Type= None Damper Position Enable Set Point
Reset Flag Cooling Enable Set
OA Damper Zone Cooling Occ Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Minimum Outdoor Point
MinOA Pos= 10% Damper Position Set Cooling Enable Dead
Point Clg Deadband= 1.0 ºF
Band
Effective Discharge
Eff Clg Spt= ___ ºF
Whenever the unit is in the Fan Only, Cooling, Heating or Cooling Set Point
Min DAT operating state, the outdoor air dampers are pre- Clg Db= 1.0 ºF
Discharge Cooling
vented from closing below the Minimum Outdoor Damper Dead Band
Discharge Cooling
Position Set Point. Minimum Discharge
Min Clg Spt= 55.0 ºF
Cooling Set Point
During the Off, Startup, Recirc, and MWU operating states,
Maximum Discharge
the outdoor air dampers are driven continuously to 0%. Max Clg Spt= 65.0 ºF
Cooling Set Point
Unoccupied Operation Clg Propbd= 8.0ºF

Zone Cooling Propor-
tional Band
Whenever the unit is operating in the unoccupied operating Zone Temp Setup Zone Cooling Integral
states UnocEcon, UnocClg, or UnocHtg, the outdoor air Clg IntTime= 700 sec
Time
dampers are driven continuously to 0%.
Period= 60 sec Zone Control Period
No Minimum OA Reset Cooling Interstage
Compressor Setup Stage Timer= 5 min
Timer
With the 0-30% OA Damper arrangement, the Minimum
Economizer Cooling
Outdoor Damper Position Reset Flag can only be set to Clg Propbd= 30.0 ºF
Proportional Band
“None”. The dampers are always control to the Minimum
Economizer Cooling
Outdoor Damper Position Set Point except as noted in the Economizer Setup Clg IntTime= 100 sec
Integral Time
previous section when they are continuously driven to 0%.
Economizer Cooling
Clg Period= 30 sec
Network OA Reset Period
When the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset Flag is Entering Econo Operating State
set to “None”, the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set
Point can be reset between 0-30% via a network signal. If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer,
and economizer operation is available (refer to “Economizer
Changeover Method” on page 69) the unit attempts to satisfy
100% Outdoor Air Damper Control the cooling load by using outdoor air before using mechani-
cal cooling. When this is the case, the unit enters the Econo
When a unit is equipped with a 100% outdoor air hood, the operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the
outdoor air dampers are driven open continuously whenever Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the
the unit enters the Startup operating state. If they are not Cooling Enable Dead Band.
open (above 50%) at the end of the Startup operating state or
any time afterward while the fans are running, the unit is Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an optional space
shutdown on the OA Dmpr Stuck fault. temperature sensor, the Effective Cooling Enable
Set Point is set by the controller equal to the Cool-
When the unit is shut down, the dampers remain open for 30 ing Enable Set Point.
seconds after the unit airflow switch opens up indicating loss
of airflow. There are two processes involved in the Economizer control
function. The first is the process of modulating the outdoor
Note: The dampers remain open in the event that the air- air dampers to maintain the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
flow switch does not open after the fans are shut Point. The second is the process of adjusting the Effective
down. Discharge Cooling Set Point up and down between the Mini-
68 OM 138
mum Discharge Cooling Set Point and the Maximum Dis- This estimate is based on the accumulative damper drive
charge Cooling Set Point as the Ctrl Temp= value varies open versus drive close time compared to the nominal stroke
above and below the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point. of the actuator. If the controller position estimate reaches
The following sections describe these two processes. 100% open and the discharge air temperature is above the
Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the
Economizer Damper Modulation. When the Disch
Discharge Cooling Dead Band for longer than the Cooling
Air= value rises above the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
Interstage Timer, the unit makes the transition from the
Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band,
Econo to Cooling operating state regardless of the current
the outdoor damper position is increased. When the Disch
OA Damper Pos= parameter indication.
Air= value falls below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, If economizer operation becomes disabled while the unit is
the outdoor damper position is decreased. in the Econo operating state, the transition from the Econo to
The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to Cooling operating state occurs. The outdoor air dampers are
modulate the economizer dampers as the discharge air tem- driven to the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position
perature changes. Theses are the Economizer Cooling Pro- Set Point (refer to “Minimum Ventilation Control” on
portional Band, Economizer Cooling Integral Time and page 70).
Economizer Cooling Period. Although these parameters can Econo to Fan Only Operating State
be adjusted, for most applications, the factory default values The unit will leave the Econo operating state and enter the
for these parameters provide the best control. For detailed Fan Only operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value falls
information regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, below the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than
refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99. half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and either of the follow-
Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point Adjustment. ing are true:
When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Cool- 1. The economizer damper position, as indicated by the
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable OA Damper Pos= parameter in the OA Damper menu,
Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is indicates that the dampers have been at the Effective
decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec- Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point for one
tive Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Cooling Interstage Timer period.
Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set 2. The Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point has been at
Point is increased. the Maximum Discharge Cooling Set Point for one
Cooling Interstage Timer period.
Note: When the unit first enters the Econo operating state,
the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is set to The unit will also leave the Econo operating state and enter
the current Disch Temp= value. the Fan Only operating state if all cooling is disabled for any
reason. Refer to “Clg Status” on page 43.
The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to
raise and lower the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point as Economizer Changeover Method
the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Cooling
Proportional Band, Zone Cooling Integral Time and Zone Table 34: Programmable Parameters
Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted, Keypad/Display ID
for most applications, the factory default values for these
Parameter Name
parameters provide the best control. For detailed information Menu
Item Name
Name
regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to
“MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99. Economizer Changeover
EconChgovr= Enthalpy
Flag
Economizer to Cooling Operating State
Economizer Changeover
The transition from the Econo to Cooling operating state OA Damper EconChgovrT= 60 ºF
Set Point
occurs when the economizer is unable to satisfy the cooling
load and mechanical cooling is available. Normally, this Economizer Changeover
EconChgovrDiff= 1ºF
Differential
occurs when the OA Damper Pos= parameter indicates more
than 95% open and the discharge air temperature is above
the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half There are three methods of determining whether or not the
the Discharge Cooling Dead Band for longer than the Cool- outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. Two of them sense
ing Interstage Timer. enthalpy (dry bulb temperature and humidity) and one senses
outdoor air dry bulb temperature only.
To allow for the transition from the Econo to Cooling operat-
ing state in the event the outdoor air dampers get stuck or Enthalpy Changeover
there is a problem with the damper actuator feedback circuit The two optional enthalpy changeover methods use external
and the OA Damper Pos= parameter does not reach 95%, the control devices. One device compares the outdoor enthalpy
controller continually estimates the position of the dampers. with a set point; the other compares the outdoor air enthalpy
OM 138 69
with the return air enthalpy. All units with economizers are Minimum Ventilation Control
at least equipped with the outdoor air enthalpy version. The
comparative version is optional. In either case a binary input Table 35: Programmable Parameters
(MCB-BI11) is delivered to the controller indicating whether
or not outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. When the out- Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
door air is suitable for free cooling (MCB-BI11 on), the OA Menu Name Item Name
Ambient= parameter indicates “Low” and the economizer
Effective Minimum
operates as described above in the Figure on page 68. When
Eff Min OA Pos= ___% Outdoor Damper
the outdoor air is not suitable for free cooling (MCB-BI11 Position Set Point
off), the OA Ambient= parameter indicates “High” and econ-
Minimum Outdoor
omizer operation is disabled. MinOA Type= None Damper Position
To use either of these enthalpy methods, the Economizer Reset Flag
Changeover Flag must be set to “Enthalpy.” In this case, the DesingFlow= No DesignFlow Flag
Economizer Changeover Set Point is ignored.
Minimum Outdoor
For detailed information regarding the external enthalpy MinOA Pos= 10% Damper Position Set
controls, refer to the “Unit Options” section of the model- Point
specific installation manual (refer to Table 1 on page 4). Minimum Outdoor
MinOA Flow= 2000 CFM
Airflow Set Point
Dry Bulb Temperature Changeover
Outdoor Damper
When a unit is equipped with and economizer, an internal
Position Set Point at
dry-bulb temperature changeover strategy can be selected. MinOA @Max Sig=100%
Maximum External
When this method is selected, the controller compares the OA Damper Signal
OA Temp= value to the Economizer Changeover Set Point. Minimum External
The enthalpy control input is ignored in this case. Min Signal= 0%
OA Reset Signal
To use the dry bulb method, the Economizer Changeover Maximum External
Max Signal= 100%
Flag must be set to “Dry Bulb.” The controller then uses the OA Reset Signal
Economizer Changeover Set Point to determine whether or Effective Minimum
not outdoor air may be used for cooling. If the OA Temp= Outdoor Damper
MinOA ResetMax= 100%
value is less than or equal to this set point, economizer cool- Position Set Point
ing is enabled (OA Ambient= parameter indicates “Low”). If Maximum Limit
the OA Temp= value rises above this set point by more than Maximum Fan
Max Fan Diff= 50%
the Economizer Changeover Differential, economizer cool- Capacity Differential
ing is disabled (OA Ambient= parameter indicates “High”) Minimum Fan
Min Fan Diff= 20%
and the outdoor air dampers are driven to the Effective Mini- Capacity Differential
mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point (refer to “Mini- OA Reset Tempera-
Reset T Limit= 0°F
mum Ventilation Control” on page 70). ture Limit
DesignFlow Wait
Wait Time= 30 sec
Time
DesignFlow Modula-
Modband= 50%
DesignFlow tion Band
Setup DesignFlow Maxi-
Max Step= 5%
mum Step
DesignFlow Dead-
Deadband= 6%
band
Whenever power is applied to the controller, the outdoor air

dampers are prevented from closing below the Effective
Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point. This is to
ensure that a minimum amount of ventilation air is always
supplied to the space.
Note: During the Off, Startup, Recirc, and MWU operat-
ing states, the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper
Position Set Point is set to 0%.
The Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point
can be reset between the Minimum Outdoor Damper Posi-
70 OM 138
tion Set Point and the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Note: The Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset
Position Set Point Maximum Limit in a number of ways. Flag automatically reverts to “None” if the Design-
These are described as follows: Flow= parameter is set to “Yes”
Unoccupied Operation Network OA Reset
Whenever the unit is operating in the unoccupied operating When the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset Flag is
states UnocEcon, UnocClg, or UnocHtg, the Effective Mini- set to “None” and the DesignFlow Flag is set to “No”, the
mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point is set to 0%. Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point is
set equal to the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set
No Minimum OA Reset
Point. The Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point
When the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset Flag is can then be set via a network signal to meet the outdoor air
set to “None” and the DesignFlow Flag is set to “No”, the requirements.
Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point is
DesignFlow OA Airflow Measurement Reset
set equal to the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set
Point. When a unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow out-
door air measuring system and the DesignFlow Flag is set to
External OA Reset “Yes”, the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set
The Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point Point is adjusted based on the measured amount of outdoor
can be reset via a field supplied analog voltage or current air being brought into the unit. If that airflow is below the
signal. This signal can be in the range of 0-10 VDC or 0- desired value, the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper
20 mA. When the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset Position Set Point is increased and if that airflow is above the
Flag is set to “Ext V” or “Ext mA”, the Effective Minimum desired value, Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position
Outdoor Damper Position Set Point varies linearly between Set Point is decreased. The Effective Minimum Outdoor
the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point and the Damper Position Set Point is limited between the Minimum
Outdoor Damper Position Set Point at Maximum External Outdoor Damper Position Set Point and the Effective Mini-
Signal as the field voltage or current signal varies between a mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point Maximum Limit.
minimum and maximum (or maximum and minimum) value.
Note: The DesignFlow Flag can be set to “Yes” only
The range and type of field reset signal is configured using when the unit is configured with the optional
the Minimum External OA Reset Signal and the Maximum DesignFlow outdoor air measurement feature.
External OA Reset Signal and setting a jumper on the main
control board associated with analog input MCB-AI07. The Note: The Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset
analog input jumper is placed in either the “voltage” or “cur- Flag automatically reverts to “None” if the Design-
rent” position. When the jumper is in the “voltage” position, Flow= parameter is set to “Yes”
the range of the input signal can be from 0-10 VDC and The current outdoor air for each of the two OA inlets is
when in the “current” position, 0-20 mA. The input range is determined by comparing the resistance of the left and right
scaled using the Minimum External OA Reset Signal and the airflow monitoring devices (input to MCB-AO7 and MCB-
Maximum External OA Reset Signal parameters. If for AO8 respectively). These resistances are compared to tabu-
example, the field signal is to be 1-5 VDC, the Minimum lated airflow data. The two CFM values are added together
External OA Reset Signal must be set to 10% since 1 VDC is to determine the Current Flow (OA Flow=) value.
10% of the 0-10 VDC range. The Maximum External OA
At increments equal to the DesignFlow Wait Time, a Step
Reset Signal must be set to 50% since 5 VDC is 50% of the
Value is calculated. If the Flow Ratio (the ratio of the Cur-
0-10 VDC range.
rent Flow to the Minimum Outdoor Airflow Set Point multi-
Note: The previous example demonstrated “direct acting” plied by 100%) is greater than 100% by more than half of the
reset where the Effective Minimum Outdoor DesignFlow Deadband, the Effective Minimum Outdoor
Damper Position Set Point increases as the voltage Damper Position Set Point is decreased by the Step Value. If
or current signal increases. “Reverse acting” reset the Flow Ratio is less than 100% by more than half of the
can be accomplished as well. In the previous exam- DesignFlow Deadband, the Effective Minimum Outdoor
ple, if instead the Minimum External OA Reset Sig- Damper Position Set Point is increased by the Step Value.
nal were set to 50% and the Maximum External OA The Step Value is determined using the smaller of the fol-
Reset Signal where set to 10%, then the Effective lowing two calculations:
Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point
would decrease as the voltage or current signal Step Value = DesignFlow Maximum Step
increases.
Or
Refer to “External Outdoor Air Damper Reset Signal” in the
“Field Wiring” section of IM 696, MicroTech Applied Roof- DesignFlow Maximum Step
Step Value = (Error) -------------------------------------------------------------------------
top Unit Controller. DesignFlow Modulation Band
OM 138 71
Where: Note: This temperature override function is disabled
when the OA Reset Temperature Limit is set to 0°F
Error = Absolute Value of 100% – Flow Ratio and when the unit is in the Cooling operating state.
Discharge/Return Fan Differential OA Reset Once the OA reset override function is active, normal con-
When a unit is equipped with return air fan inlet vanes or a trol resume as follows:
return fan VFD, it may be necessary to increase the amount 1. If the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Reset Flag is
of outdoor air if the difference between the discharge and set to “Ext mA” or “Ext V”, normal control resumes if
return fan capacity gets to large. If this is not done the dis- the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set
charge air fan can potentially be “starved” for air. A dis- Point is more than 2% above the calculated position
charge fan operating in a “starved” condition not only has based on the external OA reset function for more than
difficulty meeting the system airflow requirements but may two minutes. Refer to “External OA Reset” on page 71.
cause damage to damper sets and/or the return fan motor or
2. If the DesignFlow Flag is set to “Yes”, normal control
VFD. To overcome this type of problem, the MicroTech II
resumes if the Flow Ratio exceeds 100% by more than
unit controller provides a discharge/return fan differential
half the DesignFlow Deadband for more than two min-
OA reset strategy, which automatically resets the Effective
utes. Refer to “DesignFlow OA Airflow Measurement
Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point as the differ-
Reset” on page 71.
ence between the discharge and return air fan capacity var-
ies.
Note: The discharge fan capacity is always assumed to be
Cooling: Multistage
100% on a zone (or space comfort) control unit.
Temperature Control
The discharge/return fan OA reset strategy is automatically
used when the difference between the discharge and return Table 36: Programmable Parameters
fan capacity exceeds the Minimum Fan Capacity Differen-
Keypad/Display ID
tial. When the difference is less than or equal to the Mini- Parameter Name
mum Fan Capacity Differential, the Effective Minimum Menu Name Item Name
Outdoor Damper Position Set Point is set to the Minimum
Effective Cooling
Outdoor Damper Position Set Point (unless it is reset higher Eff Clg Spt= ____ °F
Enable Set Point
by another one of the reset methods). As the fan differential
Cooling Enable Set
varies between the Minimum Fan Capacity Differential and Zone Cooling Occ Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Point
the Maximum Fan Capacity Differential, the Effective Mini-
mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point is reset between Cooling Enable
Dead Band
the Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point and the
Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point Minimum Dis-
Min Clg Spt= 55.0 ºF charge Cooling Set
Maximum Limit.
Point
Discharge Cooling
OA Reset Override Maximum Dis-
Under some conditions the discharge air can contain a high Max Clg Spt= 65.0 ºF charge Cooling Set
Point
percentage of outdoor air when any of the available OA reset
features are active. If the outdoor air is very cold, the dis- Clg Method= Average
Discharge Cooling
charge air could also become very cold, particularly if the Method Flag
Compressor Setup
unit is equipped with no heat. Therefore, very cold discharge Stage Time= 5 min
Cooling Interstage
temperatures could result unless some other provision is Timer
made for tempering the air. If no other provisions are avail-
able for tempering the air it may be necessary to override the Entering Cooling Operating State
outdoor air reset strategy if the discharge air becomes to
cold. The unit enters the Cooling operating state from the Recirc
or Fan Only operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value rises
To allow for such a contingency, the MicroTech II controller
above the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than
is equipped with an OA Reset Temperature Limit. If the dis-
half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and economizer opera-
charge air temperature drops below this adjustable limit by
tion is not available. The unit enters the Cooling operating
more than half the Clg Db= parameter in the Discharge
state from the Econo operating state as describe in “Econo-
Cooling menu, any of the OA reset functions (with the
mizer to Cooling Operating State” on page 69
exception of the discharge/return fan differential OA reset
function) are overridden and the Effective Minimum Out- When the unit is in the Cooling operating state, cooling
door Damper Position Set Point is reset to maintain the dis- stages are turned on and off to maintain the Ctrl Temp=
charge air temperature at this limit. value at the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point.
72 OM 138
Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an optional space Low Ambient Cooling Lockout
temperature sensor, the Effective Cooling Enable
Set Point is set by the controller equal to the Cool- Table 37: Programmable Parameters
ing Enable Set Point.
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
The controller activates the first stage of mechanical cooling Menu Name Item Name
as it enters the Cooling operating state. When the Ctrl
Temp= value is above the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point Low Ambient Cooling
OATComp Lock= 55.0 ºF
Lockout Set Point
by more than half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and the
Zone Cooling Low Ambient Cooling
Cooling Interstage Timer has expired since the last stage
OATLock Diff= 3.0 °F Lockout Set Point Dif-
change, cooling capacity is increased by one stage. When the
ferential
Ctrl Temp= value is below the Effective Cooling Enable Set
Point by more than half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and
the Cooling Interstage Timer has expired since the last stage Compressorized cooling is disabled when the outdoor air
change, cooling capacity is decreased by one stage. temperature is below the Low Ambient Cooling Lockout Set
Point. When this occurs, the Clg Status= parameter indicates
Discharge Temperature Override. While controlling either “Econo” or “Off Amb” if all cooling is not disabled
the Ctrl Temp= value to the Effective Cooling Enable Set
for some other reason. When the outdoor air temperature
Point, the controller places limits on the discharge air tem-
rises above the Low Ambient Cooling Lockout Set Point by
perature. The controller does not allow the Disch Temp=
more than the Low Ambient Cooling Lockout Differential,
value to exceed the Maximum Discharge Cooling Set Point
compressorized cooling is re-enabled. The Clg Status=
or fall below the Minimum Discharge Cooling Set Point
without taking action. If the Disch Temp= value exceeds the parameter indicates either “All Clg” or “Mech Clg” if all
Maximum Discharge Cooling Set Point, cooling capacity is cooling is not disabled for some other reason.
increased by one stage (subject to the Cooling Interstage
Timer). If the Disch Temp= value falls below the Minimum Caution: Unless the unit is equipped with the SpeedTrol
Discharge Cooling Set Point, cooling capacity is decreased low ambient condenser fan control option, the
by one stage (subject to the Cooling Interstage Timer). Low Ambient Cooling Lockout Set Point should
never be set below 45°F.
Cooling to Econo Operating State
Compressor Staging
The unit will transition from the Cooling to Econo operating
state when either of the following are true: Table 38: Programmable Parameters
1. Economizer operation is available and compressor oper- Keypad/Display ID
ation be comes disabled as describe in “Low Ambient Parameter Name
Cooling Lockout“ below. Menu Name Item Name
2. The Ctrl Temp= value is below the Effective Cooling Lead Circuit= # 1 Circuit Lead/Lag Flag
Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable Compressor Setup Circuit Staging
CompCtrl= Cross Circ
Dead Band, economizer operation is available and the Method Flag
cooling capacity is at 0% for more than the Cooling
Interstage Timer period.
On units equipped with compressorized cooling, there are
Cooling to Fan Only Operating State many different compressor staging configurations available,
depending upon unit size. For specific output staging infor-
The unit will transition from the Cooling to Fan Only operat- mation for the possible configurations, refer to the “Cooling
ing state when any of the following are true: Control Boards (CCB1 & CCB2)” section of IM 696, Micro-
1. Compressor operation is disabled as described below in Tech Applied Rooftop Unit Controller.
“Low Ambient Cooling Lockout“ and economizer oper-
In most cases the unit can be configured to either cross-load
ation is not available.
the two cooling circuits or to stage up one circuit before the
2. The Ctrl Temp= value is below the Effective Cooling other. In either case, when possible, compressors are staged
Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable up and down to equalize run hours. Also, in most of the
Dead Band, economizer operation is not available and available unit staging configurations, circuit # 1 or circuit #2
the cooling capacity is at 0% for more than the Cooling can be designated as the “lead” circuit or the unit can be set
Interstage Timer period. for automatic “lead/lag” of the circuits. The circuit lead/lag,
3. All cooling is disabled for any reason. Refer to “Clg Sta- cross-circuit loading and lead-circuit loading functions are
tus” on page 43. described in the following sections.
OM 138 73
Circuit Lead/Lag When a capacity decrease is required and the number of
operating compressors in both circuits is the same, the oper-
2 Compressors/2 Stages or 4 Compressors/4 ating compressor with the highest run hour total in the “lag”
Stages. The “lead” refrigeration circuit can be selected by circuit is turned off. When a capacity decrease is required
setting the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag. When the Circuit and the number of operating compressors in the two circuits
Lead/Lag Flag is set to “Auto”, the “lead” refrigeration cir- is not the same, the operating compressor with the most run
cuit alternates each time cooling is staged down until all the hours in the circuit with most operating compressors is
compressors are off. The refrigeration circuit with the com- turned off.
pressor with the fewest run hours becomes the “lead.”
When the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag is set to “#1”, circuit #1 Note: A disabled circuit remains at zero capacity. If the
always acts as the “lead.” When the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag is other circuit is enabled, the circuit capacity is con-
set to “#2”, circuit #2 always acts as the “lead.” trolled similar to the Lead-Loading method. If a
previously disabled circuit becomes enabled, the
Caution: Automatic lead/lag or circuit #2 lead operation cooling capacity remains where it is until there is a
should not be used if the unit is equipped with call for a capacity change at which time normal
the hot gas bypass option on circuit #1 only. “Cross Circuit” operation resumes.
2 Compressors/3 Stages or 3 Compressors/4 2 Compressors/4 Stages, 2 Compressors/6 Stages

Stages. Both of these staging configurations have or 4 Compressors/8 Stages. When a capacity increase
unequally sized compressors in the two cooling circuits and is required, the circuit operating at the lower capacity is
the staging sequence is fixed. Therefore, circuit lead/lag staged up. If both circuits are operating at the same capacity,
operation does not apply to these staging configurations and the “lead” circuit is staged up if not already at its maximum.
the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag has no affect on the unit operation. When a capacity decrease is required, the circuit operating at
2 Compressors/4 Stages, 2 Compressors/6 Stages, the higher capacity is staged down. If both circuits are oper-
4 Compressors/8 Stages. The “lead” refrigeration cir- ating at the same capacity, the “lag” circuit is staged down.
cuit can be selected by setting the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag. Note: A disabled circuit remains at zero capacity. If the
When the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag is set to “Auto”, the “lead” other circuit is enabled, it acts as the “lead” and the
refrigeration circuit alternates each time cooling is staged circuit capacity is controlled similar to the Lead-
down until all compressors are off. The refrigeration circuit Loading method. If a previously disabled circuit
with the lower run hours then becomes the “lead.” When the becomes enabled, the cooling capacity remains
Circuit Lead/Lag Flag is set to “#1” circuit #1 always acts as where it is until there is a call for a capacity change
the “lead.” When the Circuit Lead/Lag Flag is set to “#2” at which time normal “Cross Circuit” operation
circuit #2 always acts as the “lead.” resumes.
Note: In these cooling staging configurations, circuit #1 2 Compressors/3 Stages. With this staging configura-
run hours are considered equal to the run hours of tion, the compressors are always controlled in the same way.
compressor #1 and circuit #2 run hours are consid- There are no circuit “lead/lag”, “compressor run hour” or
ered equal to the run hours of compressor #2. “Cross Circuit” variations to the staging sequence. Starting
with 0% capacity, when a capacity increase is required, the
Caution: Automatic lead/lag or circuit #2 lead operation
“small” compressor on circuit #1 is turned on. When a fur-
should not be used if the unit is equipped with
ther increase is required, the “large” compressor on circuit #
the hot gas bypass option on circuit #1 only.
2 is turned on and the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is
Cross Circuit Loading turned off. For the final capacity increase, the “small” com-
pressor on circuit #1 is turned on while the “large” compres-
When the Circuit Staging Method Flag is set to “Cross Circ”, sor on circuit #2 remains on.
the two circuits are loaded and unloaded as evenly as possi-
ble. This is the more efficient method. There are differences Note: If the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is disabled,
in “Cross Circuit” staging method depending on the unit the “large” compressor on circuit # 2 operates when
compressor stage configuration. cooling is required and the cooling capacity is set to
66%. If the “large” compressor on circuit # 2 is dis-
2 Compressors/2 Stages or 4 Compressors/4 abled, the “small” compressor on circuit # 1 oper-
Stages. When a capacity increase is required and the num- ates when cooling is required and the cooling
ber of operating compressors in both circuits is the same, the capacity is set to 33%.
compressor in the “lead” circuit with the fewest run hours
that is not operating is turned on. When a capacity increase is 3 Compressors/4 Stages. With this staging configura-
required and the number of compressors in the two circuits is tion, there are no circuit “lead/lag” or “Cross Circuit” varia-
not the same, the compressor with the fewest run hours in the tions to the staging sequence. Starting with 0% capacity,
circuit with the fewest operating compressors is turned on. when a capacity increase is required, the “small” compressor
74 OM 138
on circuit #1 with the fewest run hours is turned on. When a 2 Compressors/4 Stages, 2 Compressors/6 Stages
further increase is required, the other “small” compressor on or 4 Compressors/8 Stages. When a capacity increase
circuit #1 is turned on. When a further increase is required, is required and the “lead” circuit is not at maximum, the
the “large” compressor on circuit # 2 is turned on and the “lead” circuit is staged up. When a capacity increase is
“small” compressor on circuit #1 with the most run hours is required and the “lead” circuit is already at its maximum, the
turned off. For the final capacity increase, the “small” com- “lag” circuit is staged up. When a capacity decrease is
pressor on circuit #1 that is off is turned on. required and the “lag” circuit is not at zero capacity, the
“lag” circuit is staged down. When a capacity decrease is
Note: If one of the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is required and the “lag” circuit is at zero capacity, the “lead”
disabled, the staging sequence would remain the circuit is staged down.
same except that the last stage increase would be
unavailable and the capacity would be limited to Note: A disabled circuit remains at zero capacity. If the
75%. If both of the “small” compressors on circuit other circuit is enabled, it acts as the “lead” and the
#1 are disabled, the “large” compressor on circuit circuit capacity is controlled using the Lead-Load-
#2 (50% capacity) would cycle on and off to main- ing method. If a previously disabled circuit is
tain the load. If the “large” compressor on circuit #2 enabled, the cooling capacity remains where it is
is disabled, the two “small” compressors on circuit until there is a call for a capacity change when nor-
#1 would cycle on and off (based on run hours) to mal “Lead Load” operation resumes.
maintain the load. 2 Compressors/3 Stages . With this staging configura-
tion, the compressors are always controlled in the same way.
Lead Circuit Loading
There are no circuit “lead/lag”, “compressor run hour” or
When the Circuit Staging Method Flag is set to “Lead “Lead Load” variations to the staging sequence. Starting
Load”, one circuit is loaded completely before the first com- with 0% capacity, when a capacity increase is required, the
pressor in the second circuit is turned on, and one circuit is “small” compressor on circuit #1 is turned on. When a fur-
unloaded completely before the other circuit begins to be ther increase is required, the “large” compressor on circuit
unloaded. This method provides better dehumidification but #2 is turned on and the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is
is less efficient. There are differences in “Lead Load” stag- turned off. For the final capacity increase, the “small” com-
ing method depending on the unit compressor stage configu- pressor on circuit #1 is turned on while the “large” compres-
ration. sor on circuit #2 remains on.
2 Compressors/2 Stages or 4 Compres- Note: If the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is disabled,

sors/4Stages. When a capacity increase is required and the “large” compressor on circuit #2 operates when
the number of operating compressors is 0, the compressor in cooling is required and the cooling capacity is set to
the “lead” circuit with the fewest run hours is turned on. 66%. If the “large” compressor on circuit #2 is dis-
When a capacity increase is required, “lead” circuit is staged abled, the “small” compressor on circuit #1 oper-
up if not already fully loaded. If the “lead” circuit is fully ates when cooling is required and the cooling
loaded, the compressor in the “lag” circuit with the fewest capacity is set to 33%.
run hours is turned on. When a further capacity increase is 3 Compressors/4 Stages. With this staging configura-
required, the “lag” circuit is staged up. When a capacity tion, there are no circuit “lead/lag” or “Lead Load” varia-
decrease is required, the operating compressor in the “lag” tions to the staging sequence. Starting with 0% capacity,
circuit with the most run hours is turned off. When a further when a capacity increase is required, the “small” compressor
capacity decrease is required and the “lag” circuit is not on circuit #1 with the fewest run hours is turned on. When a
already fully unloaded, the remaining compressor in the further increase is required, the other “small” compressor on
“lag” circuit is turned off. When a further capacity decrease circuit #1 is turned on. When a further increase is required,
is required, the operating compressor in the “lead” circuit the “large” compressor on circuit #2 is turned on and the
with the most run hours is turned off. Finally, when a further “small” compressor on circuit #1 with the most run hours is
capacity decrease is required and the “lead” circuit is not turned off. For the final capacity increase, the “small” com-
already fully unloaded, the remaining compressor in the pressor on circuit #1 that is off is turned on.
“lead” circuit is turned off.
Note: If one of the “small” compressors on circuit #1 is
Note: A disabled circuit remains at zero capacity. If the disabled, the staging sequence would remain the
other circuit is enabled, it acts as the “lead” and the same except that the last stage increase is unavail-
circuit capacity is controlled using the Lead-Load- able and the capacity is limited to 75%. If both of
ing method. If a previously disabled circuit is the “small” compressors on circuit #1 are disabled,
enabled, the cooling capacity remains where it is the “large” compressor on circuit #2 (50% capacity)
until there is a call for a capacity change when nor- cycle on and off to maintain the load. If the “large”
mal “Lead Load” operation resumes. compressor on circuit #2 is disabled, the two
OM 138 75
“small” compressors on circuit #1 would cycle on denser Fan Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan Differ-
and off (based on run hours) to maintain the load. ential. The fourth condenser fan in each operating circuit is
turned on when the OA Temp= value rises above the Fourth
Generic Condensing Unit Staging
Condenser Fan Set Point and is turned off when the OA
When a unit is equipped with a DX cooling coil and is inter- Temp= value falls below the Fourth Condenser Fan Set Point
faced with a field supplied condensing unit, it is equipped by more than the Condenser Fan Differential.
with a generic condenser control board (CCB1) for control-
ling the cooling stages on the condensing unit. In this case, Circuit Pumpdown
circuit lead/lag, cross-circuit loading and lead-circuit loading
Normal Circuit Pumpdown
are not applicable. The outputs on the condenser control
board (CCB1) are simply staged up and down sequentially as During normal cooling circuit operation, the circuit is
the cooling capacity changes. pumped down when the last compressor in the circuit is shut
down due to normal staging. It is also pumped down if the
Condenser Fan Control entire circuit is shut down due to any alarms other than Hi
Pres-Ckt1, Hi Pres-Ckt2, Comp #1 Alm, Comp #2 Alm,
Comp #3 Alm, and Comp #4 Alm.
Keypad/Display ID When pumdown is required for a circuit, the Liquid Line
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Solenoid Valve for that circuit is closed (output turned off)
and a compressor on that circuit operates until the circuit low
First Condenser Fan pressure switch opens at which time the compressor is turned
Cond Fan1 Spt= 0°F
Set Point
off. If the low pressure switch does not open within 180 sec-
Second Condenser onds, pumpdown is terminated by turning off the compressor
Cond Fan2 Spt= 55°F
Fan Set Point and the PumpDown-Ckt1 (or PumpDown-Ckt2) problem is
Compressor Setup Cond Fan3 Spt= 65°F
Third Condenser generated.
Fan Set Point
Manual Circuit Pumpdown
Fourth Condenser
Cond Fan4 Spt= 75°F
Fan Set Point Compressors in a Circuit are Operating: Circuit
Condenser Fan Dif- pumpdown is manually initiated if either the master pump-
Cond Fan Diff= 10°F
ferential down switch (PS3) in the main control panel or the circuit
pumpdown switch (PS1-Circuit #1 or PS2-Circuit #2) in the
On units equipped with compressorized cooling, there are up condenser control panel is placed in the Pumpdown (Off)
to four condenser fans per cooling circuit depending on the position.
size of the unit. The fans in each circuit are started and
stopped based on outdoor air temperature when circuit is Compressors in a Circuit are not Operating: Circuit
operating. The first condenser fan in each operating circuit is pumpdown is manually initiated if either the master pump-
turned on when the OA Temp= value rises above the First down switch (PS3) or the circuit pumpdown switch (PS1-
Condenser Fan Set Point and is turned off when the OA Circuit #1 or PS2-Circuit #2) is cycled from the Auto (On) to
Temp= value falls below the First Condenser Fan Set Point the Pumpdown (Off) position twice in less than 20 seconds
by more than the Condenser Fan Differential. The second and the low pressure switch is closed.
condenser fan in each operating circuit is turned on when the When pumdown is initiated for a circuit, the liquid line sole-
OA Temp= value rises above the Second Condenser Fan Set noid valve for that circuit is closed (output turned off) and a
Point and is turned off when the OA Temp= value falls below compressor on that circuit operates until the circuit low pres-
the Second Condenser Fan Set Point by more than the Con- sure switch opens at which time the compressor is turned off.
denser Fan Differential. The third condenser fan in each If the low pressure switch does not open within 180 seconds,
operating circuit is turned on when the OA Temp= value pumpdown is terminated by turning off the compressor and
rises above the Third Condenser Fan Set Point and is turned the PumpDown-Ckt1 (or PumpDown-Ckt2) problem is gen-
off when the OA Temp= value falls below the Third Con- erated.
76 OM 138
Cooling: Modulating ing Set Point up and down between the Minimum Discharge
Cooling Set Point and the Maximum Discharge Cooling Set
Temperature Control Point as the Ctrl Temp= value varies above and below the
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point. The following sections
Table 40: Programmable Parameters describe these two processes.
Keypad/Display ID Valve Modulation. When the Disch Air= value rises

Parameter Name above the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more
Menu Name Item Name than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the chilled
Effective Cooling water valve position is increased. When the Disch Air=
Enable Set Point value falls below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point
Cooling Enable Set by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the
Zone Cooling Occ Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Point chilled water valve position is decreased.
Cooling Enable Dead The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to
Band modulate the chilled water valve as the discharge air temper-
Effective Discharge ature changes. Theses are the Cooling Proportional Band,
Eff Clg Spt= ___ ºF
Cooling Set Point Cooling Integral Time and Cooling Period. Although these
Discharge Cooling parameters can be adjusted, for most applications, the fac-
Clg Db= 1.0 ºF
Dead Band tory default values for these parameters provide the best con-
Discharge Cooling
Minimum Discharge trol. For detailed information regarding tuning PID control
Min Clg Spt= 55.0 ºF loop parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on
Cooling Set Point
Maximum Discharge
page 99.
Max Clg Spt= 65.0 ºF
Cooling Set Point Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point Adjustment.
Zone Cooling Propor- When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Cool-
Clg Propbd= 8.0ºF
tional Band
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable
Zone Temp Setup Zone Cooling Integral Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is
Clg IntTime= 700 sec
Time
decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec-
Period= 60 sec Zone Control Period tive Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling
Cooling Proportional Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
Clg Propbd= 30.0 ºF
Band Point is increased.
Clg IntTime= 100 sec Cooling Integral Time Note: When the unit first enters the Cooling operating
Chilled Water Setup
Clg Period= 30 sec Cooling Period state, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is
Cooling Interstage set to the current Disch Temp= value.
Stage Timer= 5 min
Timer
raise and lower the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point as
Entering Cooling Operating State the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Cooling
The unit enters the Cooling operating state from the Recirc Proportional Band, Zone Cooling Integral Time and Zone
or Fan Only operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value rises Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted,
above the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than for most applications, the factory default values for these
half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and economizer opera- parameters provide the best control. For detailed information
tion is not available. The unit enters the Cooling operating regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to
state from the Econo operating state as describe in “Econo- “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
mizer to Cooling Operating State” on page 69. Chilled Water: Face and Bypass Damper Control
Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an option space When the unit is in the Cooling operating state, the chilled
temperature sensor, the Effective Cooling Enable water valve is driven fully open and the face and bypass
Set Point is set by the controller equal to the Cool- dampers are modulated to satisfy the cooling load. There are
ing Enable Set Point. two processes involved in the face and bypass damper con-
trol function. The first is the process of modulating the
Chilled Water: Valve Control dampers to maintain the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
When the unit is in the Cooling operating state, the chilled Point. The second is the process of adjusting the Effective
water valve is modulated to satisfy the cooling load. There Discharge Cooling Set Point up and down between the Mini-
are two processes involved in the chilled water valve control mum Discharge Cooling Set Point and the Maximum Dis-
function. The first is the process of modulating the valve to charge Cooling Set Point as the Ctrl Temp= value varies
maintain the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point. The sec- above and below the Effective Cooling Enable Set Point.
ond is the process of adjusting the Effective Discharge Cool- The following sections describe these two processes.
OM 138 77
Face and Bypass Damper Modulation. When the Cooling Enable Dead Band and any of the following are
Disch Air= value rises above the Effective Discharge Cool- true:
ing Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead 1. The chilled water valve is closed for more than one
Band, the face and bypass dampers position is increased to Cooling Interstage Timer period.
the face. When the Disch Air= value falls below the Effec- 2. The Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point has been at
tive Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the Dis- the Maximum Discharge Cooling Set Point for one
charge Cooling Dead Band, the face and bypass damper Cooling Interstage Timer period.
position is decreased to the face.
3. All cooling is disabled for any reason. Refer to “Clg Sta-
The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to tus” on page 43.
modulate the face and bypass dampers as the discharge air
temperature changes. Theses are the Cooling Proportional Heating: Multistage
Band, Cooling Integral Time and Cooling Period. Although
these parameters can be adjusted, for most applications, the Temperature Control
factory default values for these parameters provide the best
control. For detailed information regarding tuning PID con- Table 41: Programmable Parameters
trol loop parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features”
on page 99. Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point Adjustment. Menu Name Item Name
When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Cool- Eff Htg Spt= ____ °F
Effective Heating
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable Enable Set Point
Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is Zone Heating Occ Htg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Heating Enable Set
decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec- Point
tive Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Heating Enable Dead
Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Band
Point is increased. Minimum Discharge
Min Htg Spt= 55.0 ºF
Heating Set Point
Note: When the unit first enters the Cooling operating Discharge Heating
Maximum Discharge
state, the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point is Max Htg Spt= 65.0 ºF
Heating Set Point
set to the current Disch Temp= value.
Heating Interstage
Heating Setup Stage Time= 5 Min
The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to Timer
raise and lower the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point as
the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Cooling Entering Heating Operating State
Proportional Band, Zone Cooling Integral Time and Zone
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Recirc
Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted,
or Fan Only operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value falls
below the Effective Heating Enable Set Point by more than
parameters provide the best control. For detailed information
half the Heating Enable Dead Band.
regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to
“MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99. When the unit is in the Heating operating state, heating
stages are turned on and off to maintain the Ctrl Temp=
Cooling to Econo Operating State value at the Effective Heating Enable Set Point.
When economizer operation is available, the unit will leave
Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an option space
the Cooling operating state and enter the Econo operating
temperature sensor or by the dehumidification func-
state when the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effective
tion, the Effective Heating Enable Set Point is set
Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling
by the controller equal to the Heating Enable Set
Enable Dead Band and either of the following are true:
Point.
1. The chilled water valve is closed for more than one
Cooling Interstage Timer period. The controller activates the first stage of electric heat as it
2. The Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point has been at enters the Heating operating state. When the Ctrl Temp=
the Maximum Discharge Cooling Set Point for one value is below the Effective Heating Enable Set Point by
Cooling Interstage Timer period. more than half the Heating Enable Dead Band and the Heat-
ing Interstage Timer has expired since the last stage change,
Cooling to Fan Only Operating State heating capacity is increased by one stage. When the Ctrl
When economizer operation is not available, the unit will Temp= value is above the Effective Heating Enable Set Point
leave the Cooling operating state and enter the Fan Only by more than half the Heating Enable Dead Band and the
operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Heating Interstage Timer has expired since the last stage
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the change, heating capacity is decreased by one stage.
78 OM 138
Discharge Temperature Override Point by more than half the Heating Enable Dead Band.
Under these conditions, the controller enters the MWU oper-
While controlling the Ctrl Temp= value to the Effective
ating state after the normal startup sequence.
Heating Enable Set Point, the controller places limits on the
discharge air temperature. The controller does not allow the Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an option space
Disch Temp= value to exceed the Maximum Discharge Heat- temperature sensor or by the dehumidification func-
ing Set Point or fall below the Minimum Discharge Heating tion, the Effective Heating Enable Set Point is set
Set Point without taking action. If the Disch Temp= value
exceeds the Maximum Discharge Heating Set Point, heating
Point.
capacity is decreased by one stage (subject to the Heating
Interstage Timer). If the Disch Temp= value falls below the The MWU operating state is similar to the Heating operating
Minimum Discharge Heating Set Point, heating capacity is state; the only difference is that the Eff Min OA Pos= param-
increased by one stage (subject to the Heating Interstage eter is set to 0% during MWU. The unit remains in the
Timer).
MWU operating state until either the Ctrl Temp= value is
Effective Discharge Heating Set Point Limiting equal to or greater than the Effective Heating Enable Set
Point or the duration of the MWU operating state exceeds
On units equipped with multistage electric heat, the Effective the Maximum Morning Warm-up Timer setting. In either
Discharge Heating Set Point is limited by a factory set 60°F case, since the Ctrl Temp= value has not risen above the
maximum heater temperature rise limit. The controller does Effective Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the
not allow the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point to be set Heating Enable Dead Band when this occurs, the controller
higher than 60°F above the current temperature entering the enters the Heating operating state.
discharge fan as indicated by the Ent Fan= parameter in the
Temperatures menu. The Maximum Morning Warm-up Timer parameter is pro-
vided to ensure that the required minimum ventilation air is
Heating to Fan Only Operating State being supplied after a known time regardless of the space
The unit will transition from the Heating to Fan Only operat- temperature condition. For example, if actual occupancy is at
ing state when either of the following are true 8:00 a.m. and unit startup is scheduled for 6:30 a.m., a Maxi-
mum Morning Warm-up Timer setting of 90 minutes would
1. The Ctrl Temp= value is above the Effective Heating ensure that the outdoor air dampers open to minimum posi-
Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable tion when building occupancy occurs.
Dead Band and the heating capacity is a 0% for longer
than the Heating Interstage Timer period. Note: The morning warm-up function does not occur on
2. Heating is disabled for any reason. Refer to “Htg Status” units equipped with 100% OA hoods.
on page 44.
High Ambient Heating Lockout
Morning Warm-up Control Table 43: Programmable Parameters
Table 42: Programmable Parameters Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Keypad/Display ID Menu Name Item Name
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name High Ambient Heating
OATHtg Lock= 55.0 ºF
Lockout Set Point
Effective Heating Zone Heating
Eff Htg Spt= ____ °F High Ambient Heating
Enable Set Point OATLock Diff= 1.0 °F
Lockout Differential
Heating Enable Set
Zone Heating Occ Htg Spt= 70.0 ºF
Point
Heating Enable Dead Heating is disabled when the outdoor air temperature is
Band greater than the High Ambient Heating Lockout Set Point.
Timer Settings Max MWU= 90 min
Maximum Morning When this occurs, the Htg Status= parameter in the System
Warm-up Timer and Zone Heating menu indicates “Off Amb” if heating is
not disabled for some other reason. When the outdoor air
On return air units, morning warm up operation occurs after temperature drops below the High Ambient Heating Lockout
the transition from unoccupied to occupied mode when the Set Point by more than the High Ambient Heating Lockout
Ctrl Temp= value is below the Effective Heating Enable Set Differential, heating operation is re-enabled.
OM 138 79
Discharge Air Low Limit Control Heating: Modulating
Temperature Control
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Table 45: Programmable Parameters
Menu Name Item Name
Keypad/Display ID
Min DAT Ctrl= Yes Min DAT Control Flag Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
MinDAT Limit= 55.0 Minimum Discharge
Discharge Heating ºF Temperature Limit Effective Heating
Eff Htg Spt= ____ °F
Discharge Heating Enable Set Point
Htg Db= 1.0 ºF
Dead Band Heating Enable Set
Point
If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally Heating Enable Dead
Fan Only operating state), the controller can activate the unit Band
staged electric heating equipment as required to prevent the Effective Discharge
discharge air temperature from becoming too cool. It accom- Eff Htg Spt= ___ ºF
Heating Set Point
plishes this by entering the Min DAT operating state when Discharge Heating
necessary. Htg Db= 1.0 ºF
Dead Band
Entering Min DAT Operating State Minimum Discharge
Min Htg Spt= 55.0 ºF
When the Min DAT Control Flag is set to “Yes” and if the Discharge Heating Heating Set Point
Disch Temp= parameter falls below the Minimum Discharge Max Htg Spt= 65.0 ºF
Maximum Discharge
Temperature Limit by more than half the Discharge Heating Heating Set Point
Dead Band, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only Min DAT Ctrl= Yes Min DAT Control Flag
to Min DAT. When in the Min DAT operating state, heating Minimum Discharge
capacity is increased by one stage if the Disch Temp= Min DAT Limit= 55.0 ºF
Temperature Limit
parameter is below the Minimum Discharge Temperature Zone Heating Propor-
Limit by more than half the Discharge Heating Dead Band Htg Propbd= 8.0ºF
tional Band
(subject to the Heating Interstage Timer). Heating capacity is
Zone Temp Setup Zone Heating Inte-
decreased by one stage if the Disch Temp= parameter rises Htg IntTime= 700 sec
gral Time
above the Minimum Discharge Temperature Limit by more
Period= 60 sec Zone Control Period
than half the Discharge Heating Dead Band (subject to the
Heating Interstage Timer). Heating Interstage
Stage Timer= 5 min
Timer
Leaving Min DAT Operating State
Face and Bypass
When the heating capacity has be 0% for one Heat Interstage F&BP Ctrl= OpenValve
Method Flag
Time period and the Disch Temp= parameter is above the Face and Bypass
Minimum Discharge Temperature Limit by more than half F&BP Chgovr= 37 °F Changeover Temper-
Heating Setup
the Discharge Heating Dead Band, the unit leaves the Min ature
DAT operating state and re-enters the Fan Only operating Heating Proportional
state. Htg Propbd= 30.0 ºF
Band
Htg IntTime= 100 sec Heating Integral Time
Htg Period= 30 sec Heating Period
Entering Heating Operating State
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Recirc
or Fan Only operating state when the Ctrl Temp= value falls
below the Effective Heating Enable Set Point by more than
half the Heating Enable Dead Band.
Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an option space

temperature sensor or by the dehumidification func-
tion, the Effective Heating Enable Set Point is set
Point.
80 OM 138
There are several different modulating heating types avail- Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper
able with this equipment. There are some differences in the Control-Open Valve Method
control sequence depending on the heat type installed. The When a unit is equipped with steam or hot water with face
different types are described in the following sections. and bypass damper heating there are two different methods
Steam or Hot Water: Valve Control available for controlling the heating arrangement - the “Open
Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods. This section
When the unit is in the Heating operating state, the hot water
describes the “Open Valve” method.
or steam valve is modulated to satisfy the heating load.
There are two processes involved in the heating valve con- When the Face and Bypass Method Flag is set to “Open-
trol function. The first is the process of modulating the heat- Valve”, the steam or hot water valve is driven fully open
ing valve to maintain the Effective Discharge Heating Set when the unit enters the Heating operating state. The face
Point. The second is the process of adjusting the Effective and bypass dampers are then modulated to satisfy the heating
Discharge Heating Set Point up and down between the Mini- load. There are two processes involved in the face and
mum Discharge Heating Set Point and the Maximum Dis- bypass damper control function. The first is the process of
charge Heating Set Point as the Ctrl Temp= value varies modulating the dampers to maintain the Effective Discharge
above and below the Effective Heating Enable Set Point. The Heating Set Point. The second is the process of adjusting the
following sections describe these two processes. Effective Discharge Heating Set Point up and down between
the Minimum Discharge Heating Set Point and the Maxi-
Valve Modulation. When the Disch Air= value falls below mum Discharge Heating Set Point as the Ctrl Temp= value
the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point by more than half varies above and below the Effective Heating Enable Set
the Discharge Heating Dead Band, the heating valve position Point. The following sections describe these two processes.
is increased. When the Disch Air= value rises above the
Effective Discharge Heating Set Point by more than half the Face and Bypass Damper Modulation. When the
Discharge Heating Dead Band, the heating valve position is Disch Air= value falls below the Effective Discharge Heat-
decreased. ing Set Point by more than half the Discharge Heating Dead
Band, the face and bypass damper position is increased to
The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to the face. When the Disch Air= value rises above the Effec-
modulate the heating valve as the discharge air temperature tive Discharge Heating Set Point by more than half the Dis-
changes. Theses are the Heating Proportional Band, Heating charge Heating Dead Band, the face and bypass damper
Integral Time and Heating Period. Although these parame- position is decreased to the face.
ters can be adjusted, for most applications, the factory
default values for these parameters provide the best control. The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to
For detailed information regarding tuning PID control loop modulate the face and bypass dampers as the discharge air
parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on temperature changes - the Heating Proportional Band, Heat-
page 99. ing Integral Time and Heating Period. Although these
parameters can be adjusted, the factory default values for
Effective Discharge Heating Set Point Adjustment. these parameters provide the best control for most applica-
When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Heat- tions. For detailed information regarding tuning PID control
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable loop parameters, refer to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on
Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is page 99.
decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec- Effective Discharge Heating Set Point Adjustment.
tive Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Heat-
Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set
ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable
Point is increased.
Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is
Note: When the unit first enters the Heating operating decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec-
state, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is tive Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
set to the current Disch Temp= value. Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set
Point is increased.
raise and lower the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point as Note: When the unit first enters the Heating operating
the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Heating state, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is
Proportional Band, Zone Heating Integral Time and Zone set to the current Disch Temp= value.
Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted, The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to
for most applications, the factory default values for these raise and lower the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point as
parameters provide the best control. For detailed information the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Heating
regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to Proportional Band, Zone Heating Integral Time and Zone
“MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99. Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted,
OM 138 81
parameters provide the best control. For detailed information Gas Valve Modulation. When the Disch Air= value falls
regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to below the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point by more
“MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.When the unit is than half the Discharge Heating Dead Band, the gas valve
in the Heating operating state, the hot water or steam valve is position is increased. When the Disch Air= value rises above
modulated to satisfy the heating load. There are two pro- the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point by more than half
cesses involved in the heating valve control function. The the Discharge Heating Dead Band, the gas valve position is
first is the process of modulating the heating valve to main- decreased.
tain the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point. The second is The controller uses three PID control loop parameters to
the process of adjusting the Effective Discharge Heating Set modulate the gas valve as the discharge air temperature
Point up and down between the Minimum Discharge Heat- changes -the Heating Proportional Band, Heating Integral
ing Set Point and the Maximum Discharge Heating Set Point Time and Heating Period. Although these parameters can be
as the Ctrl Temp= value varies above and below the Effec- adjusted, for most applications, the factory default values for
tive Heating Enable Set Point. The following sections these parameters provide the best control. For detailed infor-
describe these two processes. mation regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer
Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
Control-Modulating Valve Method Effective Discharge Heating Set Point Adjustment.
When a unit is equipped with steam or hot water with face When the Ctrl Temp= value rises above the Effective Heat-
and bypass damper heating there are two different methods ing Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable
available for controlling the heating arrangement. These are Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is
the “Open Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods. This decreased. When the Ctrl Temp= value falls below the Effec-
section describes the “Modulating Valve” method. tive Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
When the Face and Bypass Method Flag is set to “Mod Enable Dead Band, the Effective Discharge Heating Set
Valve”, action of the steam or hot water valve versus the face Point is increased.
and bypass dampers changes depending on the OA Temp= Note: When the unit first enters the Heating operating
value. state, the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point is
If the OA Temp= value is below the Face and Bypass set to the current Disch Temp= value.
Changeover Temperature setting, the steam or hot water
valve is driven fully open when the unit enters the Heating
raise and lower the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point as
operating state. The face and bypass dampers are then modu-
the Ctrl Temp= value changes. These are the Zone Heating
lated to satisfy the heating load as described in the “Steam or
Proportional Band, Zone Heating Integral Time and Zone
Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper Control-Open
Control Period. Although these parameters can be adjusted,
Valve Method“ section above.
If the OA Temp= value is above the Face and Bypass parameters provide the best control. For detailed information
Changeover Temperature setting, the face and bypass damp- regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer to
ers are driven fully open to the face when the unit enters the “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
Heating operating state. The hot water or steam valve is then
Effective Discharge Heating Set Point Limiting. On
modulated to satisfy the heating load as described in the
units equipped with modulating gas heat, the Effective Dis-
“Steam or Hot Water: Valve Control“ section above.
charge Heating Set Point is limited according to a maximum
Gas Heat heat exchanger temperature rise limit. This factory set limit
varies depending on the unit burner model and can be found
When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the control-
on the gas heat data plate attached to the unit. The controller
ler first holds the gas valve and the minimum fire position
does not allow the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point to
(either 5% or 33% depending on the burner model installed)
be set above the current temperature entering the discharge
until the Heating Interstage Timer expires. When the Heating
fan, as indicated by the Ent Fan= parameter in the Tempera-
Interstage Timer expires, the controller modulates the gas
tures menu, by more than this maximum heat exchanger
valve to maintain satisfy the heating load. There are two pro-
temperature rise limit.
cesses involved in the heating valve control function. The
first is the process of modulating the gas valve to maintain 100% OA Units-Special Startup Sequence. If a unit is
the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point. The second is the equipped with a 100% OA hood and high-turndown (5%)
process of adjusting the Effective Discharge Heating Set modulating gas heat, and heat is required at unit startup, the
Point up and down between the Minimum Discharge Heat- furnace enters a special burner startup sequence when the
ing Set Point and the Maximum Discharge Heating Set Point unit enters the Startup operating state. Pre-firing the burner
as the Ctrl Temp= value varies above and below the Effec- allows the gas heat pre-purge sequence to occur and the
tive Heating Enable Set Point. The following sections burner to fire and warm up so that tempered air is available
describe these two processes. immediately when the fans start. The special sequence
82 OM 138
occurs if the Heat Status= parameter in the System or Zone Preheat Firing Time: The time increment that the variable
Heating menu indicates “Htg Ena” and either of the follow- orifice “increase” output relay (MCB-BO10) is energized to
ing conditions are true: achieve the “preheat firing rate.” Thirty seconds is the maxi-
mum.
1. The Ctrl Temp= value is below Effective Heating
Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating Enable Variable Orifice Travel Time: The amount of time it takes
Dead Band. the burner variable orifice to drive from the fully closed to
fully open position (30 seconds-fixed).
2. The Min DAT Control Flag is set to “Yes” and the out-
Applicable Discharge Air Temperature Set Point: Either
door air temperature is below the Minimum Discharge
the Effective Discharge Heating Set Point or the Minimum
Temperature Limit by more than half the Discharge
Discharge Temperature Limit. It is the Effective Discharge
Heating Dead Band.
Heating Set Point if the Ctrl Temp= value is below Effective
When the special gas heat startup sequence is activated upon Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
entering the Startup operating state, the burner 90 pre-purge Enable Dead Band. It is the Minimum Discharge Tempera-
cycle is started at the same time as a four-minute timer. The ture Limit if the Ctrl Temp= value is above the Effective
burner starts and operates at the minimum fire position (5%) Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
during this four-minute time period after the completion of Enable Dead Band, the Min DAT Control Flag is set to “Yes”
the pre-purge cycle. When the four-minute timer expires, the and the outdoor air temperature is below the Minimum Dis-
burner variable orifice is modulated to a “preheat firing rate” charge Temperature Limit by more than half the Discharge
according to the formula below, and where: Heating Dead Band.
Applicable Discharge Air Temperature Set Point – Outdoor Air Temperature

Preheat Firing Time = Variable Orifice Travel Time × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Heat Exchanger Temperature Rise
Maximum Heat Exchanger Temperature Rise: The maxi- the burner model installed) for longer than the Heating Inter-
mum temperature rise across the heat exchanger for safe stage Timer period.
operation. This number varies with burner model and the
Note: The unit will also transition from the Heating to Fan
baffle position and is programmed into the controller at the
Only operating state if Heating is disabled for any
factory. This value can be found on the gas heat data plate
reason. Refer to “Htg Status” on page 44.
attached to the unit. Refer also to “Software Identification
and Configuration” on page 102. Morning Warm-up Control
Outdoor Air Temperature: The current outdoor air temper-
ature input to the controller. Table 46: Programmable Parameters
Once modulated to the “preheat firing rate”, the burner Keypad/Display ID
remains at this rate for a fixed thirty second time period to Parameter Name
allow the heat exchanger to warm-up before the unit leaves Menu Name Item Name
the Startup and enters the Heating operating state at which Effective Heating
Eff Htg Spt= ____ °F
time the fans are started. After entering the Heating operat- Enable Set Point
ing state, the burner remains at the “preheat firing rate” for a Heating Enable Set
fixed four minute time period to allow the temperature to sta- Point
bilize at this rate before “normal” gas heat control begins. Heating Enable Dead
When the unit enters the Heating operating state and “nor- Band
mal” gas heat control begins, the controller then modulates Maximum Morning
Timer Settings Max MWU= 90 min
the gas valve to maintain the Ctrl Temp= value at Effective Warm-up Timer
Heating Enable Set Point as described above.
Heating to Fan Only Operating State On return air units, morning warm up operation occurs after
the transition from unoccupied to occupied mode when the
The unit will transition from the Heating to Fan Only operat-
Ctrl Temp= value is below the Effective Heating Enable Set
ing state when the Ctrl Temp= value is above the Effective
Point by more than half the Heating Enable Dead Band.
Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Heating
Under these conditions, the controller enters the MWU oper-
Enable Dead Band and the heating capacity has been at 0%
ating state after the normal startup sequence.
for longer than the Heating Interstage Timer period. The unit
will be at 0% capacity after the heating value reaches and has Note: Unless it is set by a signal from an option space
been at the low fire position (either 5% or 33% depending on temperature sensor or by the dehumidification func-
OM 138 83
tion, the Effective Heating Enable Set Point is set temperature drops below the High Ambient Heating Lockout
by the controller equal to the Heating Enable Set Set Point by more than the High Ambient Heating Lockout
Point. Differential, heating operation is re-enabled.
The MWU operating state is similar to the Heating operating Discharge Air Low Limit Control
state; the only difference is that the Eff Min OA Pos= param-
eter is set to 0% during MWU. The unit remains in the Table 48: Programmable Parameters
MWU operating state until either the Ctrl Temp= value is
equal to or greater than the Effective Heating Enable Set Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Point or the duration of the MWU operating state exceeds Menu Name Item Name
the Maximum Morning Warm-up Timer setting. In either
case, since the Ctrl Temp= value has not risen above the Effective Discharge
Eff Clg Spt= 55.0 ºF
Cooling Set Point
Effective Heating Enable Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
Heating Enable Dead Band when this occurs, the controller Discharge Cooling
Clg Db= 1.0 ºF
Dead Band
enters the Heating operating state.
Discharge Heating Min DAT Ctrl= Yes Min DAT Control Flag
The Maximum Morning Warm-up Timer parameter is pro-
vided to ensure that the required minimum ventilation air is
being supplied after a known time regardless of the space If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally
temperature condition. For example, if actual occupancy is at Fan Only operating state), the controller can activate the unit
8:00 a.m. and unit startup is scheduled for 6:30 a.m., a Maxi- heating equipment as required to prevent the discharge air
mum Morning Warm-up Timer setting of 90 minutes would temperature from becoming too cool. It accomplishes this by
ensure that the outdoor air dampers open to minimum posi- entering the Min DAT operating state when necessary.
tion when building occupancy occurs. Entering Min DAT Operating State
Note: The morning warm-up function does not occur on When the Min DAT Control Flag is set to “Yes” and if the
units equipped with 100% OA hoods. Disch Temp= parameter falls below the Minimum Discharge
Temperature Limit by more than half the Discharge Heating
High Ambient Heating Lockout Dead Band, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only
to Min DAT. When in the Min DAT operating state, heating
Table 47: Programmable Parameters capacity is increased if the Disch Temp= parameter is below
Keypad/Display ID the Minimum Discharge Temperature Limit by more than
Parameter Name half the Discharge Heating Dead Band. Heating capacity is
Menu Name Item Name
decreased if the Disch Temp= parameter rises above the
High Ambient Heating Minimum Discharge Temperature Limit by more than half
OATHtg Lock= 55.0 ºF
Lockout Set Point
Zone Heating the Discharge Heating Dead Band.
High Ambient Heating
OATLock Diff= 1.0 °F Leaving Min DAT Operating State
Lockout Differential
When the heating capacity has be 0% for one Heat Interstage
Heating is disabled whenever the outdoor air temperature is Time period and the Disch Temp= parameter is above the
greater than the High Ambient Heating Lockout Set Point. Minimum Discharge Temperature Limit by more than half
When this occurs, the Htg Status= parameter in the System the Discharge Heating Dead Band, the unit leaves the Min
and Zone Heating menu indicates “Off Amb” if heating is DAT operating state and re-enters the Fan Only operating
not disabled for some other reason. When the outdoor air state.
84 OM 138
Dehumidification Note: The Dew Point= value is calculated by the control-
ler using the Rel Humidity= value and either the
Table 49: Programmable Parameters Space Temp= or Return Air= value, depending on
the setting of the Humidity Sensor Location Flag.
Keypad/Display ID This parameter can either be set to “Space” or
Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
“Return”.
Dehumidification When the Dehumidification Method Flag is set to “None”,

Dehum Method= None the dehumidification function is disabled.
Method Flag
Relative Humidity Set The dehumidification function is also disabled if mechanical
RH Setpoint= 50%
Point cooling is disabled for any reason or if heating is disabled for
Dehumidification any reason other than due to outdoor air temperature lockout.
DewPoint Spt= 50 ºF Dew Point Set Point
RH Db= 2%
Relative Humidity Occupied/Unoccupied Dehumidification
Dead Band
When the Occupied/Unoccupied Dehumidification Flag is
DewPnt Db= 2 ºF Dew Point Dead Band set to “Occupied” then the dehumidification function will be
Occupied/Unoccu- enabled during occupied and disabled during unoccupied
Dehum Ctrl= Occupied pied Dehumidifica- unit operation. If unoccupied dehumidification operation is
tion Flag required, the Occupied/Unoccupied Dehumidification Flag
Minimum Stages= 2
Minimum Dehumidifi- must be set to “Always”. In this case the dehumidification
cation Cooling Stages function is enabled both during occupied and unoccupied
Dehum Setup Maximum Dehumidifi- operation. During unoccupied periods the unit will start up
Maximum Stages= 4
cation Stages an operate the dehumidification function until the relative
DH Stage Timer= 10 Dehumidification humidity (or dew point) set point is satisfied and then shut
min Interstage Timer back off.
Humidity Sensor
Sensor Loc= Return
Location Flag
Dehumidification Cooling Operation
Cooling Enable Set When the dehumidification function is enabled and the Rel
Zone Cooling Occ Clg Spt= 75.0ºF
Point Humidity= (or Dew Point=) value rises above the Relative
Effective Heating Humidity Set Point (or Dew Point Set Point) by more than
Eff Htg Spt= ____ ºF half the Relative Humidity Dead Band, the dehumidification
Enable Set Point
Zone Heating function is turned on. When the dehumidification function is
Heating Enable Set
Occ Htg Spt= 70.0ºF turned on, the unit enters the Heating operating state. When
Point
the dehumidification function is turned on, the unit is pre-
When the dehumidification function is active, the unit cool- vented from entering the Econo or Cooling operating state.
ing coil is controlled to cool the air low enough to wring out The cooling equipment functions as described in the follow-
moisture. Reheat is then supplied as necessary to provide ing sections.
properly conditioned air to the space. This is the only case in Compressorized Cooling
which the unit cooling and heating can be active simulta- When the dehumidification function is turned on, the cooling
neously. is staged up to the Minimum Stages and the Dehumidifica-
Enabling Dehumidification tion Interstage Timer begins timing down.
The dehumidification function should only be enabled when When the Dehumidification Interstage Timer expires, if the
the unit heating coil is located in a position down stream of Rel Humidity= (or Dew Point=) value is still above the Rel-
the unit cooling coil. Also, before the dehumidification func- ative Humidity Set Point (or Dew Point Set Point) by more
tion can be utilized, an optional humidity sensor must be than half the Relative Humidity Dead Band, cooling is
field installed and wired to the unit. For details regarding staged up to the Maximum Stages. The Dehumidification
humidity sensor installation, refer to IM696, MicroTech II Interstage Timer again is reset and begins timing down.
Applied Rooftop Unit Controller. If at the Maximum Stages and the Rel Humidity= (or Dew
With the conditions mentioned above met, the dehumidifica- Point=) value is below the Relative Humidity Set Point (or
tion function is enabled by setting the Dehumidification Dew Point Set Point) by more than half the Relative Humid-
Method Flag to either “RH” or “DewPnt”. When this param- ity Dead Band when the Dehumidification Interstage Timer
eter is set to “RH”, dehumidification operation is controlled expires, cooling is staged down to the Minimum Stages. The
to maintain the Rel Humidity= value at the Relative Humid- Dehumidification Interstage Timer again is reset and begins
ity Set Point. When this parameter is set to “DewPnt”, dehu- timing down.
midification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew If at the Minimum Stages and the Rel Humidity= (or Dew
Point= value at the Dew Point Set Point. Point=) value is below the Relative Humidity Set Point (or
OM 138 85
Dew Point Set Point) by more than half the Relative Humid- Enthalpy Wheel Control
ity Dead Band when the Dehumidification Interstage Timer
expires, cooling is staged off and the dehumidification func- Table 50: Programmable Parameters
tion is turned off.
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
Chilled Water Cooling Menu Name Item Name
When the dehumidification function is turned on, the chilled Effective Minimum Out-
OA Damper Eff Min OA Pos= ___% door Damper Position
water valve is driven to 100% capacity and the Relative Set Point
Humidity Interstage Timer begins timing down. Energy Recov- Energy Recovery Con-
Energy Rec= No
ery trol Flag
If the Rel Humidity= (or Dew Point=) value is below the
Energy Recovery Wheel
Relative Humidity Set Point (or Dew Point Set Point) by EWhl Propbd= 30.0 ºF
Proportional Band
more than half the Relative Humidity Dead Band when the
Energy Rec Energy Recovery Wheel
Dehumidification Interstage Timer expires, the chilled water EWhl IntTime= 100 sec
Setup Integral Time
valve is driven closed and the dehumidification function is Heat Recovery Wheel
turned off. EWhl Period= 30 sec
Period
Dehumidification Heating Operation When the Energy Recovery Control Flag is set to “Yes”, the
When the dehumidification function is turned on, the unit enthalpy wheel is turned on whenever the unit exhaust fan is
enters the Heating operating state and then is allow to transi- on and the current OA Damper Pos= parameter in the OA
tion between the Heating, Min DAT and Fan Only operating Damper menu indicates a value equal to the Effective Mini-
states as required to maintain the zone temperature condi- mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point. It is turned off
tions. The unit is prevented from entering the Econo or Cool- when the exhaust fan is turned off or the OA Damper Pos=
ing operating states. value is greater than the Effective Minimum Outdoor
Damper Position Set Point.
The one difference between dehumidification heating and
Constant Speed Enthalpy Wheel
normal heating operation. The Eff Heating Enable Set Point
is set equal to the current Space Temp= value when the dehu- When the unit is equipped with a constant speed enthalpy
midification function is turned on. The Eff Heating Enable wheel, the wheel is driven to maximum speed whenever the
Set Point then remains at this value while the dehumidifica- enthalpy wheel is on.
tion function is on. When the dehumidification function is Variable Speed Enthalpy Wheel
turned off, the Eff Heating Enable Set Point returns to its
normal value. When the unit is equipped with a variable speed enthalpy
wheel, the wheel is driven to maximum speed whenever the
Note: The value the Eff Heating Enable Set Point is set to enthalpy wheel is on. The speed of the wheel may be modu-
when the dehumidification function is turned on is lated as described below to prevent wheel frosting.
limited between the Cooling Enable Set Point and When there is a threat of frost on the enthalpy wheel, a vari-
the Heating Enable Set Point. able speed wheel is slowed down so that less enthalpy trans-
fer occurs and frosting of the wheel is avoided. Frosting can
Energy Recovery occur on the enthalpy wheel when the exhaust air leaving the
wheel is saturated. This condition occurs when two lines
When a unit is equipped with an optional energy recovery intersect on a psychometric chart, and it does not occur when
wheel, energy recovery is provided by drawing outside air these two lines do not intersect. One of these lines is the
across half of an enthalpy wheel and drawing exhaust air Humidity Ratio versus the dry bulb temperature for saturated
across the other half. Latent and sensible heat is transferred air. The other line is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry bulb
from the hotter moist exhaust air to the colder dry outside air temperature of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel.
in winter. Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the The two ends of this second straight line on a psychometric
hotter moist outside air to the cooler dry exhaust air in sum- chart are the outdoor air temperature at 95% relative humid-
mer. Energy recovery control consists of starting and stop- ity (point 1 in Figure 9) and the return air temperature at the
ping an exhaust fan, modulating the speed of the exhaust fan, return air relative humidity (point 2 in Figure 9). One
starting and stopping an enthalpy wheel, optionally control- exhaust air line showing frosting conditions and another
ling the speed of the enthalpy wheel and opening and closing showing no frost conditions are shown. The controller makes
a set of bypass dampers. The outdoor dampers are controlled a continuous calculation to determine if and at what tempera-
in the normal manner. Refer to “100% Outdoor Air Damper tures the saturated air and exhaust air lines intersect. When
Control” on page 68 or “Economizer” on page 68 as applica- they do not intersect, the enthalpy wheel runs at full speed.
ble. The following sections describe the control of the When they do intersect, the enthalpy wheel is controlled to a
enthalpy wheel, exhaust fan and bypass dampers. slower speed to maintain the dry bulb temperature of the
86 OM 138
exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel 3°F above the higher Exhaust Fan Control
of the two intersecting dry bulb temperatures (point ST2 in
Figure 9). This prevents the wheel from operating under Table 51: Programmable Parameters
frosting conditions.
Keypad/Display ID
When enthalpy wheel frost protection is active, the control- Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
ler modulates the speed of the enthalpy wheel using three
PID control loop parameters. These are the Energy Recovery Building Static Pres-
BldgSP Spt= 1.00 “WC
sure Set Point
Proportional Band, Energy Recovery Integral Time and Bldg Pressure
Building Static Pres-
Energy Recovery Period. Although these parameters can be BSP Db= 0.080 “WC
sure Dead Band
adjusted, for most applications, the factory default values for Building Static Pres-
these parameters provide the best control. For detailed infor- BSP Propbd= 0.400 “WC sure Proportional
mation regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer Band
Building Static P
to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99. Building Static Pres-
Setup BSP IntTime= 2.0 sec
sure Integral Time
Figure 9: Variable Speed Enthalpy Wheel Frost BSP Period= 2.0 sec
Protection - Psychometric Chart sure Period
Exhaust Fan Mini-
EF Min Cap= 5%
Saturated Air
mum Capacity Value
Energy Recovery
Energy Recovery
Energy Rec= No
Enthalpy Wheel Control Flag
Exhaust Air (Frost
Conditions) Minimum Exhaust
Saturation Min Exh On= 120 sec
Temperature
2 Fan On Timer
Timer Settings
Humidity Ration
ST2
Minimum Exhaust
Min Exh Off= 120 sec
Enthalpy Wheel Fan Off Timer
Exhaust Air (No
Frost Conditions) Second Pressure
2nd P Sensor= None
2 Sensor Present Flag
Return/Exhaust Fan
RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking
Unit Configuration Capacity Control Flag
ST1 Remote
Saturated Air Rem RF/EF Cap= 25% Return/Exhaust Fan
Capacity Set Point
1
Dry Bulb Temperature Building Pressure Control

The energy recovery option includes a variable capacity
exhaust fan equipped with either a VFD or variable inlet
vanes. When the Energy Recovery Control Flag is set to
“Yes”, the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is set
to “BldgPres” and the Second Pressure Sensor Present Flag
is set to “Bldg”, the exhaust fan is controlled based on the
building static pressure. The exhaust fan is turned on when
the outdoor air dampers are opened and the Bldg Press=
parameter value is above the Building Static Pressure Set
Point high by more than half the Building Static Pressure
Dead Band for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Off
Timer.
Note: The exhaust fan is not turned on when the outdoor
air dampers are closed (as in the Recirc or MWU
operating states).
The exhaust fan remains on until any of the following occur:
1. The Bldg Press= parameter value drops below the
Building Static Pressure Set Point by more than half the
Building Static Pressure Deadband and the RF/EF Fan
Cap= value has been at the Exhaust Fan Minimum
Capacity Value for longer than the Minimum Exhaust
Fan On Timer.
2. The discharge fan is turned off.
3. The outdoor dampers are completely closed.
OM 138 87
When the exhaust fan is on, its capacity is modulated to Return Fan Capacity Control
maintain the Bldg Press= parameter value at the Building
Static Pressure Set Point using three PID control loop param- When a unit is equipped with return fan inlet guide vanes or
eters. These are the Building Static Pressure Proportional a return fan VFD, there are two optional methods for con-
Band, Building Static Pressure Integral Time and Building trolling the return fan capacity. These are “direct building
Static Pressure Period. Although these parameters can be static pressure” control and “position” control. The follow-
adjusted, for most applications, the factory default values for ing sections describe the two methods.
these parameters provide the best control. For detailed infor-
mation regarding tuning PID control loop parameters, refer Direct Building Static Pressure Control
to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
Direct Position Control Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name
The energy recovery option includes a variable capacity Menu Name Item Name
exhaust fan equipped with either a VFD or variable inlet Building Static Pres-
BldgSP Spt= 1.00 “WC
vanes. When the Energy Recovery Control Flag is set to sure Set Point
Bldg Pressure
“Yes” and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is Building Static Pres-
BSP Db= 0.080 “WC
set to “Position”, the exhaust fan is controlled based on sure Dead Band
Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set Point. This set Building Static Pres-
point can be adjusted via network signal. The exhaust fan is BSP Propbd= 0.400 “WC sure Proportional
Band
turned on when the outdoor air dampers are opened and the Building Static P
exhaust fan capacity is commanded above the Exhaust Fan Setup BSP IntTime= 2.0 sec
sure Integral Time
Minimum Capacity Value for longer than the Minimum Building Static Pres-
Exhaust Fan Off Timer. BSP Period= 2.0 sec
sure Period
Second Pressure
Note: The exhaust fan is not turned on when the outdoor 2nd P Sensor= Bldg
Sensor Present Flag
Unit Configuration
air dampers are closed (as in the Recirc or MWU Return/Exhaust Fan
RF/EFCtrl= BldgPres
operating states). Capacity Control Flag
The exhaust fan remains on until any of the following occur: When the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is set to
1. The Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set Point is “BldgPres” and the Second Pressure Sensor Present Flag is
commanded to the Exhaust Fan Minimum Capacity set to “Bldg”, the controller modulates the return fan capac-
Value for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan On ity to maintain the Bldg Static Pressure Set Point.
Timer.
Note: Note that this feature requires an optional building
2. The discharge fan is turned off static pressure sensor.
3. The outdoor dampers are completely closed.
To do this it uses three PID control loop parameters to modu-
late the return capacity as the building static pressure
Energy Recovery Bypass Damper Control changes. Theses are Building Static Pressure Proportional
Band, Building Static Pressure Integral Time and Building
Static Pressure Period. Although these parameters can be
Keypad/Display ID adjusted, for most applications, the factory default values for
Parameter Name these parameters provide the best control. For detailed infor-
Menu Name Item Name
mation regarding tuning PID control loop parameters; refer
Effective Minimum to “MicroTech II DDC Features” on page 99.
OA Damper Eff MinOA Pos= ___% Outdoor Damper
Position Set Point Building static pressure control of the return air fan airflow
is overridden under two conditions.
The energy recovery option includes a set of bypass dampers 1. The first condition is when the return fan capacity mod-
when the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating econo- ulates down to 17% or the VFD speed is reduced to
mizer. The bypass dampers are closed whenever the OA 25%. The controller does not allow the return fan capac-
Damper Pos= parameter in the OA Damper menu is equal to ity to modulate below these fixed values.
the Effective Minimum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point. 2. The second condition is when the outdoor air dampers
The bypass dampers are driven fully open when the OA are completely closed. In this case the return fan capac-
Damper Pos= parameter is driven above the Effective Mini- ity tracks the discharge fan capacity one-to-one. In the
mum Outdoor Damper Position Set Point while the unit is in case of a constant volume discharge fan the return fan
the Econo or Cooling operating state. airflow is driven to 100%.
88 OM 138
Return Fan Direct Position Control Unoccupied Control
Table 54: Programmable Parameters Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)
Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Table 55: Programmable Parameters
Menu Name Item Name
Keypad/Display ID
Return/Exhaust Fan Parameter Name
RF/EF Ctrl= BldgPres Capacity Control Menu Name Item Name
Flag Unoccupied Heat-
Unit Configuration UnoccHtg Spt= 55.0 ºF
Remote ing Set Point
Rem RF/EF Cap= Zone Heating
Return/Exhaust Fan Unoccupied Heat-
25% UnoccHtgDiff= 3°F
Capacity Set Point ing Differential
Space Sensor
When the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is set to Unit Configuration Space Sensor= Yes
Present Flag
“Position”, the controller positions the return or exhaust fan
inlet vanes or VFD speed to the Remote Return/Exhaust Fan If an optional space (or zone) temperature sensor (ZNT1) is
Capacity Set Point. Normal building static pressure control connected to the controller, the Space Sensor Present Flag is
is overridden in this case. The Remote Return/Exhaust Fan set to “Yes” and the Unoccupied Heating Set Point is set
Capacity Set Point is then set via a network signal. If net- higher than 0°F, unoccupied heating (night setback) opera-
work communications is interrupted or is not present, the tion is available. Unoccupied heating operation is disabled if
Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set Point remains at either the Space Sensor Present Flag is set to “No” or the
the last commanded setting and then can be adjusted via the Unoccupied Heating Set Point is set to 0°F. The following is
unit keypad/display. The Remote Return/Exhaust Fan a description of unoccupied heating operation:
Capacity Set Point can be adjusted from the fixed minimum
(17% for vanes or 25% for VFD applications) to 100%. If the space temperature falls to the Unoccupied Heating Set
When the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Flag is set to Point while the unit is in the Off Unoc operating state, the
“BldgPres”, the Remote Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Set unit starts and runs.1 The controller enters the UnocHtg
Point has no effect on the unit operation. operating state after the normal startup sequence. Refer to
“Startup Control” on page 64. The UnocHtg operating state
SAF/RAF Differential OA Reset is similar to the Heating operating state except that the out-
When a unit is equipped with return air fan inlets vanes or door air dampers remain closed in the UnocHtg operating
VFD it may be necessary to increase the amount of outdoor state.
air if the difference between the discharge and return fan When the space temperature rises above the Unoccupied
capacity gets to large. If this is not done the discharge air fan Heating Set Point by more than the Unoccupied Heating Dif-
can potentially become “starved” for air. A discharge fan ferential, heating operation ends and the controller shuts
operating in a “starved” condition not only has difficulty down the fans and returns to the Off Unoc state.
meeting the system airflow requirements but may cause
damage to damper sets and/or return fan motors or VFD. To Note: The Unoccupied Heating Set Point cannot be set
overcome this type of problem, the MicroTech II unit con- higher than the Occ Htg Spt= parameter.
troller provides a discharge/return fan differential OA reset
Emergency Space Sensor Failure Operation
strategy, which automatically resets outdoor air dampers as
the difference between the discharge and return air fan A unit starts and runs in an emergency mode of operation if
capacity varies. Refer to “Discharge/Return Fan Differential all of the following are true:
OA Reset” on page 72. 1. The Space Sensor Present Flag is set to “Yes”
Note: On a zone (or space comfort) control unit, the dis- 2. The Unoccupied Heating Set Point is set higher than 0°F
charge fan capacity is always assumed to be 100%. 3. The current value of the OA Temp= parameter is below
40°F.
4. The Space Temp problem alarm occurs.
5. Unit is equipped with a functioning return temperature
sensor.
In this mode of operation the unit starts and runs continu-
ously using the return air temperature sensor as the “Control
Temperature.” Refer to “Control Temperature” on page 66.
1. The unit does not activate unoccupied heating or cooling

operation if the UnitStatus= parameter in the System menu
indicates “Off Man”, “Off Sw”, “Off Net” or “Off Alm.”
OM 138 89
Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup) Purge
Table 56: Programmable Parameters Table 57: Programmable Parameters
Keypad/Display ID Keypad/Display ID
Parameter Name Parameter Name
Menu Name Item Name
Menu Name Item Name
Unoccupied Cool-
UnoccClg Spt= 85.0 ºF Effective Cooling
ing Set Point Eff Clg Spt= 75.0 ºF
Zone Cooling Enable Set Point
Unoccupied Cool- Zone Cooling
UnoccClgDiff= 3°F
ing Differential Cooling Enable Dead-
Space Sensor band
Unit Configuration Space Sensor= Yes
Present Flag
OA Damper Max Purge= 60 min Maximum Purge Time
If an optional space (or zone) temperature sensor (ZNT1) is

connected to the controller, the Space Sensor Present Flag is If a unit is equipped with an economizer and an optional
set to “Yes” and the Unoccupied Cooling Set Point is set space (or zone) temperature sensor (ZNT1) is connected to
lower than 99°F, unoccupied cooling (night setup) operation the controller, pre-occupancy purge control is available.
is available. Unoccupied cooling operation is disabled if Designed to take advantage of cool pre-dawn outdoor air,
either the Space Sensor Present Flag is set to “No” or the purge control starts the fans and modulates the economizer
Unoccupied Cooling Set Point is set to 99°F. The following dampers to maintain occupied cooling requirements during
is a description of unoccupied cooling operation: unoccupied periods. The purge function can only be used in
conjunction with the unit internal time schedule or with a
If the space temperature rises to the Unoccupied Cooling Set network supplied time schedule.
Point while the unit is in the Off Unoc state, the unit starts
and runs.1 If the unit has an economizer and the OA Ambi- Purge operation is possible only during a time window prior
ent= parameter indicates “Low”, the controller enters the to occupancy that is defined by the Maximum Purge Time
UnocEcon operating state after the normal startup sequence. parameter (0 to 240 minutes). For example, if the unit is
If OA Ambient= parameter indicates “High” or the outdoor scheduled to start at 6:30 a.m., a Maximum Purge Time of 60
air is not cool enough to maintain the Eff Clg Spt= setting in minutes (default) allows purge operation to occur between
the Discharge Cooling menu (or the unit has no economizer), 5:30 a.m. and 6:30 a.m.
the controller enters the UnocClg operating state and acti- During the purge time window, the unit starts and runs when
vates mechanical cooling after the normal startup sequence. the following three requirements are all met:
The UnocEcon and UnocClg operating states are similar to
the Econo and Cooling operating states except that the Eff l The Space Temp= parameter value is greater than the
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half
MinOA Pos= parameter is set to 0%. If the OA Ambient= the Cooling Enable Deadband.
parameter indicates “Low”, the outdoor air dampers are wide
l The OA Ambient= parameter in the OA Damper menu
open during UnocClg. If the OA Ambient= parameter indi- indicates “Low.”
cates “High” (or there is no economizer), the outdoor air
l The OA Temp= parameter value is below the Space
dampers are fully closed during UnocClg. Temp= parameter value by more than 4°F.
When the space temperature drops below the Unoccupied During purge operation, the controller enters and remains in
Cooling Set Point by more than the Unoccupied Cooling the UnocEcon operating state after the normal startup
Differential, cooling operation ends and the controller shuts sequence. Mechanical cooling is disabled. Economizer con-
down the fans and returns to the Off Unoc state. trol during purge operation is similar to that during occupied
Note: The Unoccupied Cooling Set Point cannot be set operation.
lower than the Occ Clg Spt= parameter. The unit returns to the Off Unoc state when any of the fol-
lowing three conditions occur:
l The Space Temp= parameter value is less than the
Effective Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half
the Cooling Enable Deadband.
l The OA Ambient= parameter in the OA Damper menu
indicates “High.”
l The outdoor air temperature rises above the space tem-
perature by more than 2°F.
As conditions allow, purge control cycles the unit in this
manner until normal occupied operation begins. If the sched-
uled occupied startup time occurs during purge operation,
the unit continues running without interruption.
90 OM 138
Alarm Control When the Return Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut down.
It remains shut down until the Return Sensor fault is manu-
The following are descriptions of the various alarms that can ally cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
occur in zone (or space comfort) control rooftop units.
Disch Sensor
Note: The cause of a manual reset alarm should be inves- If the discharge air temperature sensor (DAT) fails (analog
tigated and eliminated before the unit or any dis- input MCB-AI3 open or short-circuited), the Disch Sensor
abled equipment in it is placed back into service. fault occurs.
Faults When the Disch Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It
remains shut down until the Disch Sensor fault is manually
Freeze
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
When a unit is equipped with a chilled water, hot water, or
Hi Return Tmp
steam coil, the Freeze fault occurs when the optional freez-
estat (FS1) contacts open (binary input MCB-BI7 off) as a If the unit is equipped with a return air temperature sensor
result of detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil and the Return Air= parameter value exceeds the Hi Return
temperature while the fans are running. Alm= value in the Alarm Limits menu, while the unit is
operational, the Hi Return Tmp fault occurs.
When the Freeze fault occurs, the controller shuts down the
fans, closes the outdoor air dampers, opens the chilled water When the Hi Return Tmp fault occurs, the unit is shut down.
and heating valves and set a 10-minute timer. It remains shut down until the Hi Return Tmp fault is manu-
ally cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the
freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed Hi Disch Tmp
(binary input MCB-BI7 on), the valves close. If the freez- If the Disch Air= parameter value exceeds the Hi Disch
estat contacts are still open (binary input MCB-BI7 off), the Alm= setting in the Alarm Limits menu, while the unit is
valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer resets. This operational, the Hi Disch Tmp fault occurs.
continues until the fault is manually cleared through the unit
When the Hi Disch Tmp fault occurs, the unit is shut down.
keypad or via a network signal.
It remains shut down until the Hi Disch Tmp fault is manu-
Smoke ally cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
The Smoke fault occurs when the contacts of either optional Lo Disch Tmp
discharge or return air smoke detector (SD1 or SD2) open If the Disch Air= parameter value drops below the Lo Disch
(binary input MCB-BI8 off). Alm= setting in the Alarm Limits menu while the unit is
When the Smoke fault occurs, the unit is immediately shut operational, the Lo Disch Tmp fault occurs.
down. The unit remains shut down until the smoke detector When the Lo Disch Tmp fault occurs, the unit is shut down.
is manually reset and the Smoke fault is manually cleared It remains shut down until the Lo Disch Tmp fault is manu-
through the unit keypad or via a network signal. ally cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
Note: The smoke detector can be reset by momentarily Note: The Lo Disch Tmp fault is ignored when the unit
removing power form the device. This can be leaves the Startup operating state for a time period
accomplishes by cycling control power (S1 switch). defined by the Low DAT= parameter in the Timer
Space Sensor Settings menu and when the unit is in the Cooling
operating state.
If the optional space temperature sensor (ZNT1) fails (ana-
log input MCB-AI1 open or short-circuited) while it is acting Fan Fail
as the “Control Temperature” (CtrlTemp Src= parameter is If differential pressure switch PC7 fails to detect airflow
set to “Space”) and the unit has no return air sensor, the (binary input MCB-BI6 off) within two minutes after the
Space Sensor fault occurs. unit leaves the Startup operating state or any time afterward,
When the Space Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It while the unit is running, the Fan Fail fault occurs.
remains shut down until the Space Sensor fault is manually When the Fan Fail fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal. remains shut down until the Fan Fail fault is manually
Return Sensor cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
If the unit is equipped with a return air temperature sensor OA Dmpr Stuck
(RAT) and it fails (analog input MCB-AI4 open or short-cir- On units equipped with a 100% outdoor air hood, the out-
cuited) while it is acting as the “Control Temperature” (Ctr- door air dampers are driven fully open during the Startup
lTemp Src= parameter is set to “Return”), the Return Sensor operating state before the discharge fan is started. If the OA
fault occurs. Damper Pos= parameter in the OA Damper menu does not
OM 138 91
indicate 50% or greater when the unit leaves the Startup 3. If the space temperature input is acting as the “Control
operating state, the OA Dmpr Stuck fault occurs. Temperature” (CtrlTemp Src= parameter is set to
When the OA Dmpr Stuck fault occurs, the unit is shut “Space”), the controller automatically changes the Ctr-
down. The unit remains shut down until the OA Dmpr Stuck lTemp Src= parameter to “Return”.
fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a When the Space Sensor problem occurs during an unoccu-
network signal. pied time period, the unit starts and runs continuously in the
UnocHtg operating state, using the return air temperature
Problems sensor as the “Control Temperature” if all of the following
Freeze conditions are true:
When a unit is equipped with a chilled water, hot water, or 1. The unit is equipped with a return air temperature sen-
steam coil, the Freeze problem occurs when the optional sor.
freezestat (FSl) contacts open (binary input MCB-B7 off) as 2. The OA Temp= parameter value is below 40 °F.
a result of detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil 3. The UnoccHtg Spt= parameter in the Zone Heating
temperature while the fans are off. menu is set higher than 0°F.
When the Freeze problem occurs, the controller opens the When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Space
chilled water and heating valves and set a 10-minute timer. Sensor problem automatically clears and normal unit opera-
tion resumes.
When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the
freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed Return Sensor
(binary input MCB-BI7 on), the valves close. If the freez- If the return air temperature sensor (RAT) fails (analog input
estat contacts are still open (binary input MCB-BI7 off), the MCB-AI4 open or short-circuited) while it is not acting as
valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer resets. This the “Control Temperature” (CtrlTemp Src= parameter is not
continues while the unit remains off. set to “Return”), the Return Sensor problem occurs.
Whenever the freezestat closes (binary input MCB-BI7 on), When the Return Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues
the Freeze problem automatically clears. This feature pro- to operate with the following modifications:
tects the coil(s) and allows the system to start normally when 1. Discharge temperature set point reset based on return
an occupied command is received. temperature is unavailable.
OAT Sensor 2. The Hi Return Tmp fault is disabled.
If the outdoor air temperature sensor (OAT) fails (analog When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Return
input MCB-AI5 open or short-circuited) and it is not acting Sensor problem automatically clears.
as the “Control Temperature” (CtrlTemp Src= parameter is Ent Fan Sensor
not set to “OAT”), the OAT Sensor problem occurs.
If the unit is equipped with an entering fan air temperature
When the OAT Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to sensor (EFT) and it fails (analog input MCB-AI6 open or
operate with the following modifications: short-circuited), the Ent Fan Sensor problem occurs as long
1. Discharge temperature set point reset based on outdoor as the EFT Sensor= parameter in the Unit Configuration
air is unavailable. menu is set to “Yes.” If this parameter is set to “No” the Ent
2. Compressor low ambient lockout is disabled. Fan Sensor problem indication is disabled.
3. High ambient heating lockout is disabled. When the Ent Fan Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues
4. Purge operation is disabled. Space Sensor to operate with the following modifications.
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the OAT Sen- 1. The Low Airflow problem is disabled.
sor problem automatically clears. 2. The function on gas or electric heat units that limits the
Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Discharge Heating menu
Space Sensor
based the maximum heat rise for the heat exchanger on
If the optional space temperature sensor ZNT1 fails (analog units equipped with gas or electric heat is disabled.
input MCB-AI1 open or short-circuited) on a unit equipped Refer to “Heating: Multistage” on page 78 (electric heat
with a return air temperature sensor, the Space Sensor prob- units) or “Gas Heat” on page 82 (gas heat units).
lem occurs as long as the Space Sensor= parameter in the When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Ent Fan
Unit Configuration menu is set to “Yes.” If this parameter is Sensor problem automatically clears.
set to “No” the Space Sensor problem indication is disabled.
When the Space Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues Note: Note that the EFT sensor is only provided with units
to operate with the following modifications: that have gas or electric heat.
1. Discharge temperature set point reset based on space Heat Fail

temperature is unavailable. If a unit is equipped with a gas furnace (one-stage or modu-
2. Purge operation is disabled. lating) and the burner flame safeguard (FSG) control enters
92 OM 138
the “safety lockout” state after a call for heat, relay R24 matically clears and the circuit is re-enabled. If the Lo Pres-
energizes and closes a set of contacts and delivers a binary Ckt1 problem occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one
input (binary input MCB-BI5 on) to the controller. When day and 2:00 a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automati-
this binary input is present the Heat Fail problem occurs. cally clear the third time but must be manually cleared
When the Heat Fail problem occurs, the unit continues to through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
operate with the heating system disabled by the FSG. Heat- Lo Pres-Ckt2
ing remains disabled until the flame safeguard control is
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized
manually reset. When the FSG is reset, relay R24 de-ener-
cooling only. When a call is made for circuit #2 operation, if
gizes, removing the binary input (binary input MCB-BI5 off)
the cooling circuit #2 low pressure switch (LP2) remains
from the controller, causing the Heat Fail problem to auto-
open (binary input CCB2-BI6 off) beyond a “low pressure
matically clear.
time period” after the circuit #2 liquid line solenoid is
For detailed information regarding the FSG control, refer to opened, the Lo Pres-Ckt2 problem occurs. The alarm also
the separate installation manual supplied with the gas fur- occurs any time after the “low pressure time period” expires
nace and the “Sequences of Operation” section of the model- while the circuit is operating if LP2 opens. If the unit is
specific installation manual (refer to Table 1 on page 4). equipped with low ambient condenser operation capability
Hi Pres-Ckt1 and the OA Temp= parameter value is below 45°F, the “low
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized pressure time period” is 165 seconds. Otherwise the “low
cooling only. If either of the cooling circuit #1 high pressure pressure time period” is 45 seconds.
switches (HP1 or HP3) opens (binary input CCB1-BI7 off), When the Lo Pres-Ckt2 problem occurs, the unit continues
indicating a high refrigerant pressure situation, the Hi Pres- to operate but cooling circuit #2 is disabled. Circuit #2
Ckt1 problem occurs. remains disabled for at least one cooling stage time period.
When the Hi Pres-Ckt1 problem occurs, the unit continues to After the cooling stage time period expires, the alarm auto-
operate but cooling circuit #1 is disabled. Circuit #1 remains matically clears and the circuit is re-enabled. If the Lo Pres-
disabled until both high pressure switches are closed and the Ckt2 problem occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one
Hi Pres-Ckt1 problem is manually cleared through the unit day and 2:00 a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automati-
keypad or via a network signal. cally clear the third time but must be manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
Hi Pres-Ckt2
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized Frost-Ckt1
cooling only. If either of the cooling circuit #2 high pressure This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized
switches (HP2 or HP4) opens (binary input CCB2-BI7 off) cooling without hot gas bypass operation only. If the circuit
indicating a high refrigerant pressure situation, the Hi Pres- #1 frost protection switch (FP1) opens (binary input CCB1-
Ckt2 problem occurs. BI8 off) while a compressor on cooling circuit #1 has been
When the Hi Pres-Ckt2 problem occurs, the unit continues to on for at least two minutes and the circuit #1 liquid line sole-
operate but cooling circuit #2 is disabled. Circuit #2 remains noid valve (SV1) is open, the Frost-Ckt1 problem occurs.
disabled until both high pressure switches are closed and the This indicates a cold refrigerant temperature exists at the unit
Hi Pres-Ckt2 problem is manually cleared through the unit evaporator coil on circuit #1, creating the possibility of frost
keypad or via a network signal. build-up on the coil.
Lo Pres-Ckt1 When the Frost-Ckt1 problem occurs, the unit continues to
operate but cooling circuit #1 is disabled. Circuit #1 remains
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized
disabled for at least one cooling stage time period. After the
cooling only. When a call is made for circuit #1 operation, if
cooling stage time period expires, the alarm automatically
the cooling circuit #1 low pressure switch (LP1) remains
clears and the circuit is re-enabled. If the Frost-Ckt1 problem
open (input removed from CCB1-BI6) beyond a “low pres-
occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00
sure time period” after the circuit #1 liquid line solenoid is
a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the
opened, the Lo Pres-Ckt1 problem occurs. The alarm also
third time but must be manually cleared through the unit
occurs any time after the “low pressure time period” expires
keypad or via a network signal.
while the circuit is operating if LP1 opens. If the unit is
equipped with low ambient condenser operation capability Frost-Ckt2
and the OA Temp= parameter value is below 45°F, the “low This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized
pressure time period” is 165 seconds. Otherwise the “low cooling without hot gas bypass operation only. If the circuit
pressure time period” is 45 seconds. #2 frost protection switch (FP2) opens (binary input CCB2-
When the Lo Pres-Ckt1 problem occurs, the unit continues BI8 off) while a compressor on cooling circuit #2 has been
to operate but cooling circuit #1 is disabled. Circuit #1 on for at least two minutes and the circuit #2 liquid line sole-
remains disabled for at least one cooling stage time period. noid valve (SV2) is open, the Frost-Ckt2 problem occurs.
After the cooling stage time period expires, the alarm auto- This indicates a cold refrigerant temperature exists at the unit
OM 138 93
evaporator coil on circuit #2, creating the possibility of frost is not off on a high pressure alarm. The compressor #2 input
build-up on the coil. is delivered to the compressor control board through an aux-
When the Frost-Ckt2 problem occurs, the unit continues to iliary switch on the compressor #2 contactor. Therefore,
operate but cooling circuit #2 is disabled. Circuit #2 remains precisely speaking, the alarm indicates that the controller
disabled for at least one cooling stage time period. After the commanded the compressor to start but the contactor did not
cooling stage time period expires, the alarm automatically pull in. When the unit is equipped with a compressor #2 oil
clears and the circuit is re-enabled. If the Frost-Ckt2 problem pressure switch (OP2) and/or a compressor #2 external
occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 motor protector (MP2), this condition normally occurs when
a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the either MP2or OP2 trip. If the unit is equipped with neither
third time but must be manually cleared through the unit MP2 nor OP2, this alarm simply indicates the contactor did
keypad or via a network signal. not pull in for electrical or mechanical reasons.2
When the Comp #2 Alm problem occurs, the unit continues
Comp #1 Alm
to operate but compressor #2 is disabled. Compressor #2
This alarm occurs only on units equipped with compres- remains disabled for one cooling stage time period after
sorized cooling. If compressor #1 has been commanded on which the alarm automatically clears and the compressor is
for longer than ten seconds and the compressor #1 input to re-enabled. The controller can then attempt to start compres-
the compressor control board is off (binary input CCB1-BI9 sor #2 again when required. If the Comp #2 Alm problem
off), the Comp #1 Alm problem occurs as long as the circuit occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00
is not off on a high pressure alarm. The compressor #1 input a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the
is delivered to the compressor control board through an aux- third time but must be manually cleared through the unit
iliary switch on the compressor #1 contactor. Therefore, keypad or via a network signal.
precisely speaking, the alarm indicates that the controller
commanded the compressor to start but the contactor did not Note: The OP2 device itself requires a manual reset once
pull in. When the unit is equipped with a compressor #1 oil it trips. The MP2 device automatically resets when
pressure switch (OP1) and/or a compressor #1 external the compressor motor windings cool.
motor protector (MP1), this condition normally occurs when Comp #3 Alm
either MP1or OP1 trip. If the unit is equipped with neither
MP1 nor OP1, this alarm simply indicates the contactor did This alarm occurs only on units equipped with compres-
not pull in for electrical or mechanical reasons.1 sorized cooling. If compressor #3 has been commanded on
for longer than ten seconds and the compressor #3 input to
When the Comp 1 Alm problem occurs, the unit continues to the compressor control board is off (binary input CCB1-
operate but compressor #1 is disabled. Compressor #1 BI10 off), Comp #3 Alm problem occurs as long as the cir-
remains disabled for one cooling stage time period after cuit is not off on a high pressure alarm. The compressor #3
which the alarm automatically clears and the compressor is input is delivered to the compressor control board through an
re-enabled. The controller can then attempt to start compres- auxiliary switch on the compressor #3 contactor. Therefore,
sor #1 again when required. If the Comp 1 Alm problem precisely speaking, the alarm indicates that the controller
occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 commanded the compressor to start but the contactor did not
a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the pull in. When the unit is equipped with a compressor #3 oil
third time but must be manually cleared through the unit pressure switch (OP3) and/or a compressor #3 external
keypad or via a network signal. motor protector (MP3), this condition normally occurs when
Note: The OP1 device itself requires a manual reset once either MP3 or OP3 trip. If the unit is equipped with neither
it trips. The MP1 device automatically resets when MP3 nor OP3, this alarm simply indicates the contactor did
the compressor motor windings cool. not pull in for electrical or mechanical reasons2.
Comp #2 Alm to operate but compressor #3 is disabled. Compressor #3
This alarm occurs only on units equipped with compres- remains disabled for one cooling stage time period after
sorized cooling. If compressor #2 has been commanded on which the alarm automatically clears and the compressor is
for longer than ten seconds and the compressor #2 input to re-enabled. The controller can then attempt to start compres-
the compressor control board is off (binary input CCB2-BI9 sor #3 again when required. If the Comp #3 Alm problem
off), the Comp #2 Alm problem occurs as long as the circuit occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00
1. Unit models 018 through 060 are equipped with scroll com- 2. Unit models 018 through 060 are equipped with scroll com-
pressors. Oil pressure switches are not used on these units. pressors. Oil pressure switches are not used on these units.
Also, some scroll compressor sizes are equipped with inter- Also, some scroll compressor sizes are equipped with inter-
nal motor protection. In these cases, external motor protec- nal motor protection. In these cases, external motor protec-
tors are not used. These include Comp #1 on unit models tors are not used. These include Comp #1 on unit models
018 through 036, Comp #3 on unit models 025 through 036 018 through 036, Comp #3 on unit models 025 through 036
and Comp2 on unit model 018. and Comp2 on unit model 018.
94 OM 138
a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the When the PumpDown-Ckt2 problem occurs, the unit contin-
third time but must be manually cleared through the unit ues to operate but pump down operation is terminated and
keypad or via a network signal. cooling circuit #2 is disabled. Circuit #2 remains disabled
until the PumpDown-Ckt2 problem is manually cleared
Note: The OP3 device itself requires a manual reset once
it trips. The MP3 device automatically resets when
the compressor motor windings cool. Ckt1 Clg Ena
When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the
Comp #4 Alm
main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on
This alarm occurs only on units equipped with compres- and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir-
sorized cooling. If compressor #4 has been commanded on cuit #1 compressor control board (CCB1) via an N2 bus
for longer than ten seconds and the compressor #4 input to interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss
the compressor control board is off (binary input CCB2- of N2 communication between the two boards there must be
BI10 is off), the Comp #4 Alm problem occurs as long as the an external method for the MCB to command the CCB1
circuit is not off on a high pressure alarm. The compressor board to shut off the cooling on that circuit. This is accom-
#4 input is delivered to the compressor control board through plished with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB-
an auxiliary switch on the compressor #4 contactor. There- BO7) hard wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB1
fore, precisely speaking, the alarm indicates that the control- board (binary input CCB1-BI12).
ler commanded the compressor to start but the contactor did
If the MCB is communicating with the CCB1 board and the
not pull in. When the unit is equipped with a compressor #4
“cooling enable” output from MCB is on but the “cooling
oil pressure switch (OP4) and/or a compressor #4 external
enable” input to CCB1 remains off, indicating a wiring prob-
motor protector (MP4), this condition normally occurs when
lem between the boards, the Ckt1 Clg Ena problem occurs.
either MP4or OP4 trip. If the unit is equipped with neither
MP4 nor OP4, this alarm simply indicates the contactor did When the Ckt1 Clg Ena problem occurs, cooling circuit #1 is
not pull in for electrical or mechanical reasons2. disabled. Cooling circuit #1 remains disabled until the prob-
lem is corrected and the Ckt1 Clg Ena problem is manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
to operate but compressor #4 is disabled. Compressor #4
remains disabled for one cooling stage time period after Ckt2 Clg Ena
which the alarm automatically clears and the compressor is When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the
re-enabled. The controller can then attempt to start compres- main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on
sor #4 again when required. If the Comp #4 Alm problem and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir-
occurs three times between 2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 cuit #2 compressor control board (CCB2) via an N2 bus
a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss
third time but must be manually cleared through the unit of N2 communication between the two boards there must be
keypad or via a network signal. an external method for the MCB to command the CCB2
Note: The OP4 device itself requires a manual reset once board to shut off the cooling on that circuit. This is accom-
it trips. The MP4 device automatically resets when plished with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB-
the compressor motor windings cool. BO7) hard wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB2
board (binary input CCB2-BI12).
PumpDown-Ckt1 If the MCB is communicating with the CCB2 board and the
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized “cooling enable” output from MCB is on but the “cooling
cooling only. If the cooling circuit #1 low pressure switch enable” input to CCB2 remains off, indicating a wiring prob-
(LP1) fails to open (binary input CCB1-BI6 off) within 180 lem between the boards, the Ckt2 Clg Ena problem occurs.
seconds of the initiation of a cooling circuit #1 pumpdown When the Ckt2 Clg Ena problem occurs, cooling circuit #2 is
cycle, the PumpDown-Ckt1 problem occurs. disabled. Cooling circuit #2 remains disabled until the prob-
When the PumpDown-Ckt1 problem occurs, the unit contin- lem is corrected and the Ckt2 Clg Ena problem is manually
ues to operate but pump down operation is terminated and cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
cooling circuit #1 is disabled. Circuit #1 remains disabled GenC Clg Ena
until the PumpDown-Ckt1 problem is manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal When a unit is equipped with a DX cooling coil and is inter-
faced with a field supplied condensing unit; it is equipped
PumpDown-Ckt2 with a generic condenser control board for controlling the
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized field supplied condensing unit (CCB1). The main control
cooling only. If the cooling circuit #2 low pressure switch board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on the generic
(LP2) fails to open (binary input CCB2-BI6 off) within 180 condenser control board via an N2 bus interface between the
seconds of the initiation of a cooling circuit #2 pumpdown two boards. If the MCB detects a loss of N2 communication
cycle, the PumpDown-Ckt2 problem occurs. there must be an external method for the MCB to command
OM 138 95
the CCB1 board to shut off the cooling. This is accomplished MCB is set to 0%. Any cooling that may be operating at the
with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB-BO7) hard time of the communication failure remains on (on either cir-
wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB1 board (binary cuit) until the MCB leaves the Cooling operating state due to
input CCB1-BI12). normal operation. When the MCB leaves the Cooling operat-
If the MCB is communicating with the CCB1 board and the ing state the “cooling enable” output (MCB-BO7) is turned
“cooling enable” output from MCB is on but the “cooling off and, therefore, the “cooling enable” input to the CCB1
enable” input to CCB1 remains off, indicating a wiring prob- and CCB2 boards is removed (binary inputs CCB1-BI12 and
lem between the boards, the GenC Clg Ena problem occurs. CCB2-BI12 off) and this causes the CCB1 and CCB2 to
completely stage off all cooling. The MCB then does not re-
When the GenC Clg Ena problem occurs, cooling is dis- enter the Cooling operating state until communication is re-
abled. Cooling remains disabled until the problem is cor- established with at lease one cooling control board. When
rected and the GenC Clg Ena problem is manually cleared communications between the MCB and CCB1 is re-estab-
through the unit keypad or via a network signal. lished, the Ckt1 Comm Fail problem automatically clears.
HtgB Htg Ena
Ckt2 Comm Fail
When a unit is equipped with multi-stage electric heat, it is
When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the
equipped with an electric heat control board for controlling
main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on
the heat (EHB1). The main control board (MCB) controls
and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir-
the heating outputs on the electric heat control board via an
cuit #2 compressor control board (CCB2) via an N2 bus
N2 bus interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects
interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss
a loss of N2 communication there must be an external
of N2 communication between the two boards, the Ckt2
method for the MCB to command the EHB1 board to shut
Comm Fail problem occurs.
off the heating. This is accomplished with a “heating enable”
output from MCB (MCB-BO9) hard wired to a “heating When the Ckt2 Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is
enable” input to the EHB1 board (EHB1-BI1). not in the Cooling operating state, the unit is allowed to enter
the Cooling operating state as long as the MCB is communi-
If the MCB is communicating with the EHB1 board and the
cating with the circuit #1 cooling control board (CCB1). In
“heating enable” output from MCB is on but the “heating
this case the cooling capacity is limited to that available from
enable” input to EHB1 remains off, indicating a wiring prob-
circuit #1. If the MCB is not communicating with either
lem between the boards, the HtgB Htg Ena problem occurs.
cooling control board (CCB1 or CCB2), the unit is not
When the HtgB Htg Ena problem occurs, heating is disabled. allowed to enter the Cooling operating state.
Heating remains disabled until the problem is corrected and
When the Ckt2 Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is
the HtgB Htg Ena problem is manually cleared through the
in the Cooling operating state, the unit remains in the Cool-
unit keypad or via a network signal.
ing operating state. However, the maximum cooling capacity
Ckt1 Comm Fail is limited to that of circuit #1 if the MCB is communicating
When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the with the circuit #1 cooling control board (CCB1). If the
main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on MCB is not communicating with either cooling control
and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir- board (CCB1 or CCB2), the current cooling capacity in the
cuit #1 compressor control board (CCB1) via an N2 bus MCB is set to 0%. Any cooling that may be operating at the
interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss time of the communication failure remains on (on either cir-
of N2 communication between the two boards, the Ckt1 cuit) until the MCB leaves the Cooling operating state due to
Comm Fail problem occurs. normal operation. When the MCB leaves the Cooling operat-
ing state the “cooling enable” output (MCB-BO7) is turned
off and, therefore, the “cooling enable” input to the CCB1
not in the Cooling operating state, the unit is allowed to enter
and CCB2 boards is removed (binary inputs CCB1-BI12 and
the Cooling operating state as long as the MCB is communi-
CCB2-BI12 off) and this causes the CCB1 and CCB2 to
cating with the circuit #2 cooling control board (CCB2). In
completely stage off all cooling. The MCB then does not re-
this case the cooling capacity is limited to that available from
enter the Cooling operating state until communication is re-
circuit #2. If the MCB is not communicating with either
established with at lease one cooling control board. When
cooling control board (CCB1 or CCB2), the unit is not
communications between the MCB and CCB2 is re-estab-
allowed to enter the Cooling operating state.
lished, the Ckt2 Comm Fail problem automatically clears.
in the Cooling operating state, the unit remains in the Cool- GenC Comm Fail
ing operating state. However, the maximum cooling capacity When a unit is equipped with a DX cooling coil and is inter-
is limited to that of circuit #2 if the MCB is communicating faced with a field supplied condensing unit; it is equipped
with the circuit #2 cooling control board (CCB2). If the with a generic condenser control board (CCB1) for control-
MCB is not communicating with either cooling control ling the field supplied condensing unit. The main control
board (CCB1 or CCB2), the current cooling capacity in the board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on the generic
96 OM 138
condenser control board via an N2 bus interface between the energy recovery control board via an N2 bus interface
two boards. If the MCB detects a loss of N2 communication between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss of N2
between the two boards, the GenC Comm Fail problem communication between the two boards, the ERecB Comm
occurs. Fail problem occurs.
When the GenC Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is When the ERecB Comm Fail problem occurs, the energy
not in the Cooling operating state, the unit is not allowed to recovery system is disabled. When communications between
enter the Cooling operating state. the MCB and EHB1 is re-established, the ERecB Comm Fail
When the GenC Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is problem automatically clears.
in the Cooling operating state, the unit remains in the Cool- Warnings
ing operating state. However, the current cooling capacity in
the MCB is set to 0%. Any cooling that may be operating at OA Dmpr Stuck
the time of the communication failure remains on until the The OA Dmpr Stuck warning occurs if either of the follow-
MCB leaves the Cooling operating state due to normal oper- ing conditions exist:
ation. When the MCB leaves the Cooling operating state the
“cooling enable” output (MCB-BO7) is turned off and, 1. The OA Damper Pos= parameter in the OA Damper
therefore, the “cooling enable” input to the CCB1 board is menu indicates more than 5% open three minutes after
removed (binary input CCB1-BI12 off) and this causes the the controller enters the Off operating state.
CCB1 to completely stage off all cooling. The MCB then 2. The unit is equipped with and economizer and the OA
does not re-enter the Cooling operating state until communi- Damper Pos= parameter in the OA Damper menu is
cation is re-established with the cooling control board less than 95% open when the OA Ambient= parameter
(CCB1). When communications between the MCB and in the OA Damper menu indicates “low” and the con-
CCB1 is re-established, the GenC Comm Fail problem auto- troller is in either the Cooling or UnocClg operating
matically clears. state. Note that the outdoor air dampers should be at
100% under these conditions.
HtgB Comm Fail
When the OA Dmpr Stuck warning occurs unit operation is
When a unit is equipped with multi-stage electric heat, it is not affected. When the alarm condition is corrected, the OA
equipped with an electric heat control board for controlling Dmpr Stuck warning must be manually cleared through the
electric heat (EHB1). The main control board (MCB) con- unit keypad or via a network signal.
trols the heating outputs on the electric heat control board via
an N2 bus interface between the two boards. If the MCB Airflow Switch
detects a loss of N2 communication between the two boards, If the unit has been in the Off operating state for at least
the HtgB Comm Fail problem occurs. thirty minutes and the PC7 airflow switch input to the main
When the HtgB Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is controller indicates airflow (binary input MCB-BI6 on), the
not in a heating operating state, the unit is not allowed to Airflow Switch warning occurs. This normally indicates a
enter the a heating operating state. problem with the PC7 airflow switch.
When the HtgB Comm Fail problem occurs while the unit is When the Airflow Switch warning occurs, unit operation is
in a heating operating state, the unit remains in the heating not affected. When the alarm condition is corrected, the Air-
operating state. However, the current heating capacity in the flow Switch warning must be manually cleared through the
MCB is set to 0%. Any heating that may be operating at the unit keypad or via a network signal.
time of the communication failure remains on until the MCB Dirty Filter
leaves the Heating operating state due to normal operation.
When the MCB leaves the heating operating state the “heat- If the pressure drop across the first filter section in the unit
ing enable” output (MCB-BO9) is turned off and, therefore, exceeds the setting of the PC5 differential pressure switch
the “heating enable” input to the EHB1 board is removed while the unit is operational, the dirty first filter input is
(binary input EHB1-BI1 off) and this causes the EHB1 to removed from MCB (binary input MCB-BI9 off) and the
completely stage off all heating. The MCB then does not re- Dirty Filter warning occurs.
enter any heating operating state until communication is re- When the Dirty Filter warning occurs, unit operation is not
established with the cooling control board (EHB1). When affected. The Dirty Filter warning must be manually cleared
communications between the MCB and EHB1 is re-estab- through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
lished, the HtgB Comm Fail problem automatically clears.
Dirty FnlFltr
ERecB Comm Fail If the pressure drop across the final filter section in the unit
When a unit is equipped with an energy recovery wheel, it is exceeds the setting of the PC6 differential pressure switch
equipped with an energy recovery control board for control- while the unit is operational, the dirty final filter input is
ling the energy recovery wheel (ERB1). The main control removed from MCB (binary input MCB-BI10 off) and the
board (MCB) controls the energy recovery outputs on the Dirty FnlFltr warning occurs.
OM 138 97
When the Dirty FnlFltr warning occurs, unit operation is not GenC H/W
affected. The Dirty FnlFltr warning must be manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal. When a unit is equipped with a DX cooling coil and is inter-
faced with a field supplied condensing unit; it is equipped
Ckt1 H/W with a generic condenser control board for controlling the
When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the field supplied condensing unit (CCB1). The main control
main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on the generic
and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir- condenser control board via an N2 bus interface between the
cuit #1 compressor control board (CCB1) via an N2 bus two boards. If the MCB detects a loss of N2 communication
interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss there must be an external method for the MCB to command
of N2 communication between the two boards there must be the CCB1 board to shut off the cooling. This is accomplished
an external method for the MCB to command the CCB1 with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB-BO7) hard
board to shut off the cooling on that circuit. This is accom- wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB1 board (binary
plished with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB- input CCB1-BI12).
BO7) hard wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB1
board (binary input CCB1-BI12). If the MCB is communicating with the CCB1 board and the
If the MCB is communicating with the CCB1 board and the “cooling enable” output from MCB is off but the “cooling
“cooling enable” output from MCB is off but the “cooling enable” input to CCB1 remains on, indicating that the “cool-
enable” input to CCB1 remains on, indicating that the “cooling enable” input to the CCB1 board is “stuck” on, the GenC
ing enable” input to the CCB1 board is “stuck” on, the Ckt1 H/W warning occurs.
H/W warning occurs. When the GenC H/W warning occurs, unit operation is not
When the Ckt1 H/W warning occurs, unit operation is not affected. The GenC H/W warning must be manually cleared
affected. The Ckt1 H/W warning must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
HtgB H/W
Ckt2 H/W
When a unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the When a unit is equipped with multi-stage electric heat, it is
main control board (MCB) controls the cooling outputs on equipped with an electric heat control board for controlling
and receives cooling circuit input information from the cir- the heat (EHB1). The main control board (MCB) controls
cuit #2 compressor control board (CCB2) via an N2 bus the heating outputs on the electric heat control board via an
interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects a loss N2 bus interface between the two boards. If the MCB detects
of N2 communication between the two boards there must be a loss of N2 communication there must be an external
an external method for the MCB to command the CCB2 method for the MCB to command the EHB1 board to shut
board to shut off the cooling on that circuit. This is accom- off the heating. This is accomplished with a “heating enable”
plished with a “cooling enable” output from MCB (MCB- output from MCB (MCB-BO9) hard wired to a “heating
BO7) hard wired to a “cooling enable” input to the CCB2 enable” input to the EHB1 board (EHB1-BI1).
board (binary input CCB2-BI12).
If the MCB is communicating with the EHB1 board and the
If the MCB is communicating with the CCB2 board and the
“heating enable” output from MCB is off but the “heating
“cooling enable” output from MCB is off but the “cooling
enable” input to EHB1 remains on, indicating that the “heat-
enable” input to CCB2 remains on, indicating that the “cool-
ing enable” input to the EHB1 board is “stuck” on, the HtgB
ing enable” input to the CCB2 board is “stuck” on, the Ckt2
H/W warning occurs.
H/W warning occurs.
When the Ckt2 H/W warning occurs, unit operation is not When the HtgB H/W warning occurs, unit operation is not
affected. The Ckt2 H/W warning must be manually cleared affected. The HtgB H/W warning must be manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal. through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
98 OM 138
MicroTech II DDC Features
The MicroTech II unit controller uses PID control algorithms Note: In this method, position feedback from the control
(referred to as “PID objects”) to control modulating output actuators is not used for control purposes.
devices in order to keep a controlled variable at or near the
desired set point. These devices are generally either floating- Table 58 on page 100 lists the modulating devices controlled
point actuators or variable frequency motor drives (VFD). using this method. Figure 10 is a schematic representation of
There is a pair of outputs defined for each modulating device this control scheme.
to be controlled. One output energizes to increase the capac-
ity and the other energizes to decrease the capacity of the Cascaded PID Method
modulating device. There are two different PID controls
schemes used to control the modulating output devices. In some cases, the controller uses actuator position (or VFD
These are the “Direct PID Method” and the “Cascaded PID speed) feedback and a combination of a Position PID object
Method.” The “Direct PID Method” uses one Velocity PID and a Velocity PID object to control actuator (or VFD) con-
object to directly control the modulating device outputs. The trol outputs to maintain a controlled variable at a set point. In
“Cascaded PID Method” uses one Position PID and one this “cascaded” control scheme, the set point and the current
Velocity PID object in a “cascaded” manner to control the value of the controlled variable are input to the Position PID
modulating device outputs. object. The Position PID object then calculates a new actua-
tor position (or VFD speed) set point and inputs this into the
Direct PID Method Velocity PID object. The Velocity PID object then compares
the current actuator position (or VFD speed) feedback signal
In some cases, the controller uses a Velocity PID object
to the new position set point and determines a “time on” for
directly to turn actuator control outputs on and off to main-
either the increase or decrease output as necessary to main-
tain a controlled variable at a set point. In these cases the set
tain the feedback signal at the current position (or speed) set
point and current value of the controlled variable are input to
point. This information is input into a position adjust output
the Velocity PID object. The Velocity PID object determines
object (PAO) which in turn commands the output device
a “time on” for either the increase or decrease output as nec-
increase or decrease output on and off, repositioning the
essary to reduce the “error” between the set point and the
actuator (or changing VFD speed).
controlled variable. This information is input into a position
adjust output object (PAO) which in turn commands the out- Table 58 on page 100 lists the modulating devices controlled
put device increase or decrease output on and off, reposition- using this method. Figure 11 is a schematic representation of
ing the actuator. this control scheme.
Figure 10: Direct PID Method Control Scheme
Actuator
Set Point + Velocity PID PAO
Position
-
Controlled
Variable
Figure 11: Cascaded PID Method Control Scheme
Actuator or
Set Point + Position PID + Velocity PID PAO
VFD Position
- -
Controlled
Actuator Position (or VFD Speed) Feedback
Variable
OM 138 99
Table 58: MicroTech II Modulating Output Devices
Modulating Device Decrease Binary Output Increase Binary Output PID Method Controlled Variable
Hot Water Valve Actuator MCB-BO9 MCB-BO10 Direct Discharge Temperature

Steam Valve Actuator MCB-BO9 MCB-BO10 Direct Discharge Temperature
Gas Valve Actuator MCB-BO9 MCB-BO10 Direct Discharge Temperature
Chilled Water Valve Actuator MCB-BO7 MCB-BO8 Direct Discharge Temperature
Heating F&BP Actuator MCB-BO9 MCB-BO10 Direct Discharge Temperature
Cooling F&BP Actuator MCB-BO7 MCB-BO8 Direct Discharge Temperature
Economizer Damper Actuator MCB-BO5 MCB-BO6 Cascaded Discharge Temperature
Return/Exhaust Fan Inlet Vane
MCB-BO15 MCB-BO16 Cascaded Building Static Pressure
Actuator or VFD
Enthalpy Wheel Exhaust Air
Enthalpy Wheel VFD ERC1-BO7 ERC1-BO8 Direct
Temperature
Effective Discharge Cooling Set
- - Direct Control Temperature
Point
Effective Discharge Heating Set
- - Direct Control Temperature
Point
PID Control Parameters matic system “hunting” will likely occur. When in doubt,
this parameter should be set to the factory default setting.
Associated with each modulating output device, there is a set
Note: The Period parameter is not allowed to be set higher
of three adjustable PID control parameters. These are the
than the Integral Time parameter. If this is
Period, Proportional Band and Integral Time.
attempted the Period parameter reverts to its previ-
Note: Since derivative control is not generally required in ous setting.
HVAC control strategies, the Derivative Time Proportional Band and Integral Time
parameter of the PID object is set to 0 and is not
adjustable through the unit keypad/display. The The Proportional Band and the Integral Time parameters
Derivative Time parameter can only be adjusted have a similar effect on the PID control action. Increasing
using the MicroTech II Service Tool. either the Proportional Band or the Integral Time has a slow-
ing effect on the control action. Decreasing either the Pro-
Since the factory settings for these parameters should proportional Band or the Integral Time has a speeding effect on
vide the best control action, field changes are not recom- the control action. Increasing or decreasing both parameters
mended. If problems arise, these parameters should first be at the same time has a more dramatic slowing or speeding
set back to the factory settings if they have been changed in effect. Increasing one while decreasing the other tends to
the field. If adjustment is then required, caution should be have countering effects on the control action. Therefore, if it
used since parameters grossly out of adjustment can cause becomes necessary to slow down or speed the control action,
erratic unit operation and possible equipment damage. these two parameter should generally not both be changed at
Changes should only be made in small increments and to the same time. One parameter should remain unchanged
only one parameter at a time. After each change, enough while the other is increased or decreased. Proper “tuning” of
time for the system to stabilize should be allowed before fur- the Proportional Band and the Integral Time parameters
ther changes are made. Refer to the following sections for involves finding an acceptable “balance” between the two.
guidelines regarding how the specific parameters affect the Note: The Integral Time parameter is not allowed to be set
control action of the PID algorithm. lower than the Period parameter. If this is attempted
the Integral Time parameter reverts to its previous
Period setting.
Unless grossly misadjusted, changing the Period parameter
generally has a relatively small effect on the PID control Adjusting PID Control Parameters
action. It should generally be set to a value of the same mag-
nitude and within 1/4 to 2/3 the time constant of the system Correcting System Instability (“Hunting”)
being controlled. If the Period is set too long, loss of system If the system control is unstable (“hunting”), this generally
control will likely occur. If the Period is set too short, dra- means the control response is too “fast.” To correct system
100 OM 138
“hunting”, generally the first step is to slow down the controlled variable approach to the set point is acceptable.
response by increasing the Integral Time until the system This may, however, result in system instability (“hunting”).
becomes stable. This may, however, cause “sluggishness” in If system instability occurs, the Integral Time should be
the controlled variable approach to the set point during tran- increased to slow down the control response and stabilize the
sient conditions (such as at unit start up).1 If system “slug- control action.
gishness” occurs after the Integral Time is adjusted, it means When in doubt, these parameters should be set to the factory
the overall control response is now too “slow” and the default setting.
response must be speeded up by reducing the Proportional
Band. When the Proportional band is changed so that the CAUTION
controlled variable approach to the set point is acceptable, it
may then be necessary to readjust the Integral Time to re-sta- Grossly misadjusting PID parameters can
bilize the control action. cause erratic unit operation and equipment
When in doubt, these parameters should be set to the factory damage.
default setting.
PID control parameters should only be adjusted
Correcting System “Sluggishness” by trained personnel having a thorough under-
If the system control is “sluggish”, meaning in the controlled standing of how the parameters affect overall
variable approach to the set point during transient conditions system operation. Generally these parameters
(such as at unit start up) is too slow, this generally means the do not need to be adjusted from the factory
overall control response is too “slow.”2 To correct system default settings.
“sluggishness”, the first step is to speed up the overall sys-
tem response by decreasing the Proportional Band so that the
1. Once operating, the system can be checked for sluggish- 2. Once operating, the system can be checked for sluggish-
ness by changing the set point and measuring the time it ness by changing the set point and measuring the time it
takes for the controlled variable to reach the set point. takes for the controlled variable to reach the set point
OM 138 101
Software Identification and Configuration
Table 59: Software Component Identification
Software Label Description
AHU ID= 2506010xxx Program Version Loaded into Main Control Board (MCB)
CompB1 ID= 2506011xxx Program Version Loaded into Circuit #1 Condenser Control Board (CCB1)
CompB2 ID= 2506011xxx Program Version Loaded into Circuit #2 Condenser Control Board (CCB2)
GenCB ID= 2506012xxx Program Version Loaded into Generic Condenser Control Board (CCB1)
HtgB ID= 2506012xxx Program Version Loaded into Electric Heat Control Board (EHB1)
ERecB ID= 2506013xxx Program Version Loaded into Energy Recovery Control Board (ERB1)
KP ID= xxxxxxxxxx Keypad Object and Version Loaded into Main Control Board
The unit control code is made up of up to seven software Main Control Board (MCB)
components. All unit applications include a main control
board (MCB) application code component and a keypad/dis-
Configuration
play object component. Then, depending on the unit configu- After the main control board software component is loaded
ration, there may be one or more Auxiliary control boards into the MCB, it must be “configured” for the specific con-
each loaded with an application code component. Each com- trol application. This consists of setting the value of 20 con-
ponent is assigned a software identification label which configuration variables within the MCB. These variables define
sists of a 10 digit number. This number includes a seven digit things such as the type of cooling, number of compressors
base number, followed by a two digit version number, fol- and cooling stages and the type of heat. If all of these items
lowed by a one character revision letter. The various soft- are not set appropriately for the specific unit, the unit will
ware component identification labels can be determined via not function properly. Collectively these 20 parameters make
the AHU ID=, CompB1 ID=, CompB2=, GenCB ID=, HtgB up a 22 digit string called the “configuration string.” The
ID=, ERecB ID= and KP ID= parameters in the Unit Con- factory configuration string for the unit is printed on a label
figuration menu. These can also be read using the MicroTech attached to the control box panel near the MCB. Table 60
II Service Tool. lists the configuration string variables including the position
with in the string, description of the parameter, the variable
object and attribute name and the applicable settings for
each. The factory default values are shown in bold font.
Table 60: Software Configuration String
Configuration
Description Object Name Attribute Name Values (Default in Bold)
String Position
0 RA Zone Control
1 RA DAT Control
1 Unit Type .Applications.McQ RT.Unit State Unit Type (1579)
2 100 OA Zone Control
3 100 OA DAT Control
0 None
1 Compressorized Clg
2 Cooling Type .Applications.McQ RT.Cooling Clg Type (63177)
2 Chilled Water
3 F&BP Ctrl
0 2 Comp/2 Stage
1 2 Comp/3 Stage
2 2 Comp/4 Stage
3 2 Comp/6 Stage
Compressorized
3 .Applications.McQ RT.Cooling Comp Config (63886) 4 3 Comp/4 Stage
Cooling Configuration
5 4 Comp/4 Stage
6 Not Used
7 4 Comp/8 Stage
8 Generic Condenser
Generic Condenser
4 .Applications.McQ RT.Cooling Max Stages (63646) 1 - 8 Stages (Default = 4)
Stages
0 No
5 Low Ambient .Applications.McQ RT.Cooling Low Ambient (63593)
1 Yes
102 OM 138
Table 60: Software Configuration String (Continued)
Configuration
Description Object Name Attribute Name Values (Default in Bold)
String Position
6 Future Use - - -
0 None
1 Single Position 30%
7 Damper Type .Applications.McQ RT.Damper Ctrl Damper Type (63301)
2 Single Position 100%
3 Economizer
0 No DesignFlow
.Applications.McQ RT.Damper 1 018-030 (800)
8 Design Flow Action Table 1(793) 2 036-040 (802)
Ctrl.OA Flow Calc
3 045-075 (047)
4 080-135 (077)
0 None
1 F&BP Ctrl
2 Multi Staged
3 Modulated Gas, 3 - 1
9 Heating Type .Applications.McQ RT.Heating Htg Type (63530)
4 Modulated Gas, 20 - 1
5 Steam or Hot Water
6 Single Stage Gas
7 Single Stage Electric
10 Max Heating Stages .Applications.McQ RT.Heating Max Stages (63646) 1 - 8 Stages (Default = 1)
11,12 & 13 Max Heat Rise .Applications.McQ RT.Heating Max Heat Rise (63640) Three Digits (Default = 100)
0 Constant Volume
14 Discharge Fan Type .Applications.McQ RT.DF Cap Ctrl Fan Ctrl Type (2296) 1 Variable Inlet Vanes
2 Variable Freq Drive
0 Constant Volume
1 Variable Inlet Vanes
15 Return Fan Type .Applications.McQ RT.RF Cap Ctrl Fan Ctrl Type (2296)
2 Variable Freq Drive
3 No Return Fan
Return/Exhaust Fan 0 None

1 Tracking
16 Capacity Control .Applications.McQ RT.RF Cap Ctrl RF Cap Ctrl (63861)
2 Bldg Press
Method 3 Position
0 None
Second Pressure .Applications.McQ RT.Static P
17 Second P Sensor (63923) 1 Duct
Sensor Type Select
2 Bldg
Entering Fan Temp Entering Fan Sensor 0 No
18 .Applications.McQ RT
Sensor (63424) 1 Yes
0 None
.Applications.McQ RT.Energy
19 Energy recovery Energy Rec Type (63889) 1 Constant Speed Wheel
Recovery
2 Variable Speed Wheel
0 No
20 Final Filter .Applications.McQ RT Final Filter Status (63463)
1 Yes
0 Draw Through Preheat
21 Heating Configuration .Applications.McQ RT.Heating Htg Config (63890) 1 Draw Through Reheat
2 Blow Through
0 Draw Through
22 Cooling Configuration .Applications.McQ RT.Cooling Clg Config (63165)
1 Blow Through
Main Control Board (MCB) Data the battery removed), the most recently archived data is
restored to the controller.
Archiving
Note: When this archived data restoration process occurs,
All MCB control parameters and the real time clock settings it increases the controller start up and initialization
are backed up by the MCB battery when power is removed time period by approximately 75 seconds.
from the MCB. In the event of a battery failure, the MCB
includes a data archiving function. Once a day, just after
midnight, all the MCB control parameter settings are Keypad/Display Objects
archived to a file stored in the MCB FLASH memory. If the There are seven different standard versions of the key-
MCB is powered up with a low or defective battery (or with pad/display software object. One of these must be loaded
OM 138 103
into the main control board along with the main control string variables described in “Main Control Board (MCB)
board component. The keypad object defines the arrange- Configuration“. The three variables are:
ment of the data displayed on the unit keypad/display. One l Unit Type (1)
of these versions is the Generic Keypad Object. This keypad l Discharge Fan Type (12)
version contains all the possible MicroTech II keypad items. l Return Fan Type (13)
However, all of these items do not always apply depending Table 61 lists the keypad objects, including the configuration
on the main control board configuration string. For this rea- string variable values that determine which is applicable to a
specific unit
son, six other keypad objects have been created which are
subsets of the Generic Keypad Object. These are Keypad Note: Typically the Generic Keypad Object is not loaded
Object #1, Keypad Object #2, Keypad Object #3, Keypad into units at the factory. It is listed because it can be
Object #4, Keypad Object #5 and Keypad Object #6. Of loaded into a controller in the field.
these six keypad objects, the object applicable to a given unit Note: Special keypad objects are assigned a unique spe-
depends upon three of the MCB software configuration cial keypad object ID.
Table 61: Keypad/Display Software Component Definition
Configuration String Variable (Position #)

Keypad Object # KP ID =
Unit Type (1) Discharge Fan Type (12) Return Fan Type (13)
1 2506001xxx 0 or 2 0 0 or 3
2 2506002xxx 1 or 3 0 0 or 3
3 2506003xxx 1 or 3 1 or 2 3
4 2506004xxx 0 or 2 0 1 or 2
5 2506005xxx 1 or 3 0 1 or 2
6 2506006xxx 1 or 3 1 or 2 1 or 2
Generic 2506007xxx 0, 1, 2, or 3 0, 1 or 2 0, 1, 2 or 3
Special xxxxxxxxxx Special Special Special
104 OM 138
Troubleshooting
In general, when a unit is not operating as expected, the first menu. Once the current operating state is determined, it then
step in troubleshooting the MicroTech II control system can be assessed whether or not the control is operating cor-
should always be to determine the current operating state and rectly in that state and if not why. The following sections dis-
then determine why the unit is currently in that operating cuss various scenarios and some steps for troubleshooting
state. The current operating state is determined via the unit them.
keypad by viewing the UnitStatus= parameter in the System
Table 62: Fans Operate After Normal Startup Sequence But:
Problem Check
1. Unit does not leave Fan Only and 1.1. Check Clg Status= parameter in System menu:
enter the Econo or Cooling operat- 1. The unit does not enter the Econo operating state unless the Clg Status=
ing state. parameter indicates “All Clg” or “Econo.” If it does, refer to Item 1.2
below.
2. The unit does not enter the Cooling operating state unless the Clg Sta-
tus= parameter indicates “All Clg” or “Mech Clg.” If it does, refer to
Item 1.2 below.
3. The unit does not enter the Econo or the Cooling operating state if the
Clg Status= parameter indicates something other than “All Clg”,
“Econo” or “Mech Clg.” If this is the case, refer to “Clg Status” on
page 43 to determine the reason.
1.2. Compare the Ctrl Temp= parameter to the Eff Clg Spt= parameter in the Zone
Cooling menu.
1. The unit does not enter the Econo or Cooling operating state unless the
current value of the Ctrl Temp= parameter is above the Eff Clg Spt= by
more than half the Clg Deadband= parameter in the Zone Cooling menu.
If it is and the unit still does not enter either the Econo or Cooling operat-
ing state, MCB is likely defective.
2. If the current value of the Ctrl Temp= parameter is not above the Eff Clg
Spt= by more than half the Clg Deadband= parameter in the Zone Cool-
ing menu, the Eff Clg Spt= parameter must be adjusted accordingly to
enable cooling operation. Refer to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65.
2. Unit does not leave Fan Only and 2.1. Check Htg Status= parameter in System menu:
enter Heating operating state. 1. The unit does not enter the Heating operating state unless the Htg Sta-
tus= parameter indicates “Htg Ena”. If it does, refer to Item 2.2 below.
2. The unit does not enter the Heating operating state if the Htg Status=
parameter indicates anything other than “Htg Ena.” If this is the case,
refer to “Htg Status” on page 44 to determine the reason.
2.2. Compare the Ctrl Temp= parameter to the Eff Htg Spt= parameter in the Zone
Heating menu.
1. The unit does not enter the Heating operating state unless the current
value of the Ctrl Temp= parameter is below the Eff Htg Spt= by more
than half the Htg Deadband= parameter in the Zone Heating menu. If it
is and the unit is equipped with multi-stage or modulating heat, refer to
Item 2.3 below. If it is and the unit still does not enter the Heating operat-
ing state, MCB is likely defective.
2. If the Ctrl Temp= is not below the Eff Htg Spt= by more than half the Htg
Deadband= parameter in the Zone Heating menu, the Eff Htg Spt=
parameter must be adjusted accordingly to enable heating operation.
Refer to “Heat/Cool Changeover” on page 65
OM 138 105
Table 63: Unit Does Not Startup and Run at All:
Problem Check
1. Unit does not leave the Off Unoc operat- 1.1. Check Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu:
ing state. (UnitStatus= parameter in the 1. If the Occupancy = parameter in the Occupancy menu indicates
System menu indicates “Off Unoc” and either “Occ” or “Bypass” and the unit remains in the Off Unoc
unit does not start.) operating state, MCB is likely defective
2. If the Occupancy = parameter in the Occupancy menu indicates
“Unocc” refer to Item 1.2 below.
1.2. Check Occ Mode= parameter in the Occupancy menu:
1. If the Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Unocc”, the unit starts only
if unoccupied heating (night setback) or unoccupied cooling (night
setup or purge) operation is active. Refer to “Unoccupied Control”
on page 89.
2. If the Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto”, the unit starts only if
at least one of the following are true:
a) Field time clock terminals 101 to 102 on TB2 in the main con-
trol box are made (binary input MCB-BI1 is on). Refer to
“External Time Scheduling” on page 51.
b) Internal time schedule indicates an occupied period. Refer to
“Internal Daily Scheduling” on page 49.
c) Holiday time schedule indicates an occupied period. Refer to
“Holiday Scheduling” on page 49.
d) One event schedule indicates an occupied period. Refer to
“One Event Scheduling” on page 49.
e) Network time schedule indicates an occupied period. Refer to
“Network Time Scheduling” on page 51.
f Unoccupied heating (night setback) or unoccupied cooling
(night setup or purge) operation is active. Refer to “Unoccu-
pied Control” on page 89.
If any one of items a) through f) is true and the Occupancy=
parameter in the Occupancy menu still indicates “Unocc” and the
unit remains in the “Off Unoc” operating state, MCB is likely
defective.
2. Unit does not leave the Off Sw operating 2.1. Check terminals 101 and 104 on TB2 in the main control box:
state. (UnitStatus= parameter in the Sys- 1. The unit is disabled and remains in the Off Sw operating state
tem menu indicates “Off Sw” and unit when terminal 101 is made to 104 on TB2 (binary input MCB-BI2
does not start.) is on).
2. If terminal 101 is not made to 104 on TB2 (binary input MCB-BI2
is off) and the UnitStatus= parameter continues to indicated “Off
Sw”, MCB is likely defective.
106 OM 138
Table 63: Unit Does Not Startup and Run at All: (Continued)
Problem Check
3. Unit does not leave the Off Net operating 3.1. Check Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu:
state. (UnitStatus= parameter in the Sys- 1. If the Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu is set to anything
tem menu indicates “Off Net” and unit other than “Auto” and the UnitStatus= parameter in the System
does not start.) menu continues to indicate “Off Net”, refer to Item 3.2.
2. If the Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu is set to “Auto”, the
UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Net” when the Appl Mode=
parameter in the System menu is set to “Off.” If the Appl Mode=
indicates something other than “Off” and the UnitStatus= parame-
ter in the System menu continues to indicate “Off Net”, refer to
Item 3.2.
3.2. Check Emerg Override= parameter in Occupancy menu:
1. The UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Net” when the Emerg
Override= parameter is set to “Off.”
2. If the Emerg Override= parameter is set to “Norm” and the Unit-
Status= parameter continues to indicate “Off Net”, MCB is likely
defective.
4. Unit does not leave the Off Alm operat- 4.1. Press the ALARM key on the unit keypad to Check Active Alarm 1
ing state. (UnitStatus= parameter in the menu:
System menu indicates “Off Alm” and 1. If the Active Alarm 1 menu indicates an active “fault”, the alarm
unit does not start.) condition must be corrected and the “fault” cleared before unit can
be started.
2. If the Active Alarm 1 menu indicates “None” or an alarm type
other than a “fault” and the UnitStatus= parameter in the System
menu continues to indicate “Off Alm”, MCB is likely defective.
5. Unit does not leave the Off Man operat- 5.1. Check Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu:
ing state. (UnitStatus= parameter in the 1. If the Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu is set to “Off”, the
System menu indicates “Off Man” and UnitStatus= parameter indicates “Off Man.” The Ctrl Mode=
unit does not start.) parameter must be set to something other than “Off” before the unit
will start.
2. If the Ctrl Mode= parameter in System menu is set to anything
other than “Off” and the UnitStatus= parameter in the System
menu still indicates “Off Man”, MCB is likely defective.
OM 138 107
Table 64: Unit Does Not Shut Off:
Problem Check
1. Occupancy = parameter in Occupancy 1.1. Check Terminals 101 to 102 on TB2 in the main control box:
menu indicates “Occ” and unit does not 1. The Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu indicates “Occ”
shut off. and the unit runs continuously if the field time clock terminals 101
to 102 on TB2 in the main control box are made (binary input
MCB-BI1 is on). If 101 to 102 are not made, refer to Item 1.2.
1.2. Check the Occ Mode= parameter in System menu:
1. The Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu indicates “Occ”
and the unit runs continuously if the Occ Mode= parameter in Sys-
tem menu is set to “Occ”.
2. The Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu indicates “Occ”
and the unit runs if the Occ Mode= parameter in Occupancy menu
is set to “Auto” and any one of the following are true:
a) Internal time schedule indicates an occupied period.
b) Holiday schedule indicates an occupied period.
c) One event schedule indicates an occupied period.
c) Network time schedule indicates an occupied period.
If none of the items a), b), c) or d) above are true and the Occu-
pancy= parameter in Occupancy menu continues to indicate
“Occ”, MCB is likely defective.
2. Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy 2.1. Check the UnoccHtg Spt= parameter in the Zone Heating menu:
menu indicates “Unocc” and unit does 1. If following conditions are all true, the unit starts and runs in the
not shut off. unoccupied heating mode with the Occupancy= parameter in
Occupancy menu indicating “Unocc”:
a) The Space Sensor= parameter in the Unit Configuration menu
is set to “Yes.”
b) The UnoccHtg Spt= parameter in the Zone Heating menu is
set to a value greater than 0°F.
c) The current Space Temp= value is or was below the UnoccHtg
Spt= parameter in the Zone Heating menu and has not risen
above the UnoccHtg Spt= by more than the UnoccHtgDiff=
parameter in the Zone Heating menu.
If any of the items a), b) or c) above are not true and the unit con-
tinues to run while the Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu
indicates "Unocc", refer to Item 2.2.
2.2. Check the UnoccClg Spt= parameter in the Zone Cooling menu:
1. If following conditions are all true, the unit starts and runs in the
unoccupied cooling mode with the Occupancy= parameter in
Occupancy menu indicating “Unocc”:
a) The Space Sensor= parameter in the Unit Configuration menu
is set to “Yes.”
b) The UnoccClg Spt= parameter in the Zone Cooling menu is
set to a value less than 99°F.
c) The current Space Temp= value is or was below the UnoccClg
Spt= parameter in the Zone Cooling menu and has not
dropped below the UnoccClg Spt= parameter by more than the
UnoccClgDiff= parameter in the Zone Cooling menu.
If any of the items a), b) or c) above are not true and the unit con-
tinues to run while the Occupancy= parameter in Occupancy menu
indicates “Unocc”, MCB is likely defective.
108 OM 138
13600 Industrial Park Boulevard, Minneapolis, MN 55441 USA (612) 553-5330

Microtech Ii™ Applied Rooftop Unit Controller: Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Microtech Ii™ Applied Rooftop Unit Controller: Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Microtech Ii™ Applied Rooftop Unit Controller: Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual OM 138

Group: Applied Systems

Date: April 2001

© 2000 McQuay International

Using the Keypad/Display

Discharge Cooling OA Damper Discharge Heating Energy Recovery Dehumidification A

Sub Menus (Continued)

Frost-Ckt1= Slow HtgB Comm Fail= Slow

Sub Menus (Continued)

Previous Alarm 6 Previous Alarm 7 Previous Alarm 8

Alarm Name Alarm Name Alarm Name

Figure 3: LCD Display Format

Clear Alarm Password

Pressing this key changes the displayed menu or menu item

Down Arrow (-) Key: Keypad/Display Exercises

8. When the MinOA Pos= parameter is at the desired value

6. When the Enter/Save key is pressed and if the password

1. Pressing the Back/Cancel key changes the display to

7. Pressing the Down Arrow (-) key once decrements the

Airflow Bldg Pressure

Table 3: Airflow Menus

Temperature trol Temp= parameter rises above this parameter by more

Table 4: Temperature Menus

Table 6: Schedules Menus

Setup/Service CompB1 ID. CompB1 ID= is a status only item which

Manual Control Smoke. Smoke= is an adjustable item used to determine the

Table 9: Previous Alarm Menus

Alarm Name - - Same As Active Alm 1

Off Net Cool Only

The System menus includes two parameters that determine Auto

Unocc Int Sched

Keypad/Display ID Start Minute

Table 19: Programmable Parameter

Current OA Temperature – Heating Outdoor Air Temperature Zero

Current Space Temperature – Effective Heating Enable Set Point

Current OA Temperature – Cooling Outdoor Air Temperature Zero

The minutes before occupancy are on the following formula:

Current Space Temperature – Effective Cooling Enable Set Point

Table 20: Unit Alarms

Menu Line Active Alarm 1 Previous Alarm 1

Up to four active alarms are displayed in the Active Alarm 1,

When an active alarm is cleared the remaining active alarms

Hi Disch Alm= 170 ºF

Table 23: Programmable Parameters Keypad/Display ID

An optional zone (space) temperature sensor can be installed

The Startup Initialization Timer defines the duration of the

Table 28: Operating States

Before Startup Caution: The Startup Initialization Timer should be set so

Minimum Inlet Vane Position

When the controller receives a startup command, its operat-

} Cooling Enable Dead Band

Heating Enable Dead Band

Table 32: Programmable Parameters Table 33: Programmable Parameters

Minimum Outdoor Effective Cooling

Unoccupied Operation Clg Propbd= 8.0ºF

Whenever power is applied to the controller, the outdoor air

2 Compressors/3 Stages or 3 Compressors/4 2 Compressors/4 Stages, 2 Compressors/6 Stages

2 Compressors/2 Stages or 4 Compres- Note: If the “small” compressor on circuit #1 is disabled,

Keypad/Display ID Valve Modulation. When the Disch Air= value rises